Home

LSP User`s Manual and Reference

1. 90 LCR circuit termination 89 LCR circuit voltage oooooooooomoooo 90 leap frog technique eee eee eee 107 Liner Models Input 0005 97 Liner Models Input paramagnetic 96 Liner Models Input termination 89 SWI Hess 2a ee te Kan AN Re E awe ed oed 9 load balance flag definition 33 load balance flag balance interval 32 load balance flag initial balance flag 33 load balance flag override balance flag 33 load balance flag region balance flag 33 load balance flag Regions Input 55 load timing interval definition 33 IoadLev ler ium a ot E Ss 9 LONG LONG INT compiler directives 19 LONG LONG INT Data Type Errors 14 Lorentzian resonance ferrite 94 lower cutoff definition 134 LSP Simulation Code llsuusu 1 CSP UNNS i opeki NG Ka NAA a ds 25 Chapter 10 General Index M MacOSX Compiling on Unix and Mac OS X 13 MacOSX Single Processor Machines 7 MAFCO Magnetic Field File 161 MAG3D Magnetic Field File 160 magnetic fields external External Fields Input E 100 magnetic fields external EXTERNAL_BFIELDS 17 magnetic fields external field 102 magnetic hysteresis model applied current 34 magnetic hysteresis model hystere
2. 000 60 TRILATERAL sample input 60 TUNGSTEN so ee eh NG ka NG omen DENG Pdf 72 78 type external field definition 101 type functions Functions Input 144 type definition piei nE h 73 U units Conventions aan 5 units Potentials Input o o oo 71 units Regions Input 00 54 units User Units s s RR REA zs 25 UNITS CGS compiler directives 22 UNITS MKS compiler directives 23 Unix Compiling on Unix and Mac OS X 13 Unix Single Processor Machines T Unknown Compiler Directive Errors 14 upper cutoff definition 134 USE CONDUCTIVITY compiler directives 23 USE CONDUCTIVITY dump conductivity flag 41 USE OHMIC TERMS compiler directives 23 USE OHMIC TERMS conductivity medium 76 USE OHMIC TERMS scalar movie components 46 USE PERMEABILITY compiler directives 23 USE PERMEABILITY paramagnetic 96 USE PERMEABILITY permeability 74 USE_PERMITTIVITY compiler directives 23 USE PERMITTIVITY dielectric 94 USE PERMITTIVITY dielectric constant 73 USE_PYTHON compiler directives 23 USE_QEOS compiler directives 23 USE_SUBCELLS compiler directives 23 USE_SUBCELLS Subgrid Models Input
3. 9 input file input 1sp DEC Cluster 8 input file input 1sp IBM SP2 9 input file input 1sp Intel Teraflop 8 input file input 1sp Renumber Utility 165 input file input 1sp Running LSP 7 input file input 1sp Single Processor Machines er m T input file input 1sp Workstation Network 8 input file lsp mak 00 004 14 input filas Tsp tiise v eS ek eds 13 input file lspmake 04 14 input file lspmake bat 14 input file MAFCO Magnetic Field File 100 input file MAG3D Magnetic Field File 100 input file make pe rie re re a peenaa 14 input file makedef 404 13 input file makedef alpha 13 input file makedef linux 13 input file makedef snl 13 input file makedef tflop 13 input file Makefile usus 13 input file Method 2 Scattering File 157 input file Method 3 Backscattering File 157 input file Method 4 Cross Section File 159 input file Particle Interaction Data File 138 input file pgroup Workstation Network 8 input file restart dat o oo oo 7 input file script 1sp IBM SP2 9 input file scri
4. 76 collisions LSP Simulation Code 2 collisions Particle Interaction Data File 161 collisions Particle Interaction Input 138 Command Pile soad Eee etr REACH 11 Command File Running LSP 7 Co mumnents 22 eder ad npe Er eed ana 28 compilation errors 14 Compiler Directives lesse esee 15 compiler directives Compiling on MS Windows M en 14 compiler directives GTid o oo o o 52 compiler directives Regions Input 55 compiler directives Startup Messages 10 compiler directives User Units 25 Compiling LSP ubere IN pere tee 13 compiling LSP Startup Messages 10 complex magnetic permeability model MAGNETIC DISPERSION 20 components definition 78 components conductivity medium 76 components list Of oooooooooomooo 78 Computational Solid Geometry CSG 56 conductivity medium definition 76 conductivity definition 93 conductivity dump_ohmic_quantities_flag 42 conductivity method 1 sample input 80 conductors Objects Input 56 CONE definition 4gb akin RR 58 CONE sample input se eese eese 58 connection rank definition 67 control sample input se eese 30 Control Input 3122 VR ELE eX 30
5. 0 004 85 Circuit Models Input circuit 67 Circuit Models Input connection rank 67 Circuit Models Input Outlet Boundaries 63 Circuit Models Input temporal function outlet boundary cat Bead ae ie te adel 68 circuit voltage_measurement 68 cloud in cell CIC EXTENDED_PARTICLES TRETE 17 cloud in cell CIC LSP Simulation Code 2 coax boundaries sample input 64 cold test flag definition 34 collision frequencies Particle Interaction Data File cud Ale paw RE UL UC be DP RE 161 collision energies definition 78 collision_energies scatter_angles 81 collisional plasma model dump_montecarlo_diagnostics_flag 41 collisional plasma model fluid_species_flag A et ee abe Pe aa NO MEAT 106 collisional plasma model IONIZATION_ON 19 collisional plasma model migrant_species_flag Lieb DEP APUL Rp IP oh aes 106 collisional plasma model montecarlo scattering flag 107 collisional plasma model SCATTERING_ON 21 COLLISIONAL_PLASMA compiler directives 16 COLLISIONAL_PLASMA FLUID PHYSICS 18 COLLISIONAL PLASMA FRICTIONAL EFFECTS 18 COLLISIONAL PLASMA IONIZATION ON 19 COLLISIONAL PLASMA Particle Interaction Input cubic d pet TUNE POP E Sen aha RA COD aed 138 COLLISIONAL PLASMA SCATTERING ON 21 R E Clark and T P Hughes collisions conductivity medium
6. 123 higherstate sample input 124 higherstate atomic number 105 higherstate NUMBER DENSITIES 21 higherstate Particle Species Input 105 hybrid plasma model fluid species flag 106 hybrid plasma model migrant species flag Lue de nM atis rsa Bees AP aid aa 106 hybrid fluid species definition 135 hybrid fluid species movie tag definition zxvgidgdanianA xe un vada ied Yard aha 136 hybrid kinetic species definition 135 hybrid kinetic species movie tag definition Tana BG BA NG GAP LT E EE EE 135 hysteresis definition 95 Hysteresis Data File oooooooooooooo 163 Hysteresis Data File hysteresis 95 hysteresis applied current 34 hysteresis Hysteresis Data File 163 hysteresis MAGNETIC HYSTERESIS 20 I IBM SP2 2 ra hn ee NG TER DX LY eR 9 impedance product function definition 91 Implicit Field Algorithm 0 37 implicit solutions Convergence Probes 154 implicit_acceleration_parameter definition lXGldeiiGeneaQ stetur desta edu Y ees 37 IMPLICIT_FIELDS compiler directives 19 IMPLICIT FIELDS dielectric 94 IMPLICIT FIELDS DIRECT IMPLICIT 16 IMPLICIT FIELDS EXACT IMPLICIT IT IMPLICIT FIELDS ferrite 94 IMPLICIT FIELDS implicit iteration
7. sesssssessee e 165 8 2 Renumber Utility eee eee eee ee 165 9 References 2 499 4 a wenas 167 10 General Index wisi io Re m ee oO OES 169
8. 39 6 2 8 2 fluid streaming factor real 39 6 2 8 3 flux limit fraction real 39 6 2 8 4 kinetic migration interval integer 39 6 2 85 pdv term flag fag 39 6 2 8 6 verossb flag flag joss e s 39 6 2 8 7 surface viscosity flag flag 40 Moving Frame Algorithm 40 6 2 9 1 moving frame velocity real 40 6 2 9 2 moving frame start time real 40 Diagnostic QOutput aa 40 6 2 10 1 dump accelerations flag flag 40 6 2 10 2 dump bfield flag flag 40 6 2 10 3 dump charge density flag flag 40 6 2 10 4 dump conductivity flag flag 41 6 2 10 5 dump current density flag flag 41 6 2 10 6 dump energy deposition flag flag 41 6 2 10 7 dump interval integer 41 6 2 10 8 dump_montecarlo_diagnostics_flag flag R E Clark and T P Hughes 6 2 10 9 dump number densities flag flag 42 6 2 10 10 dump ohmic quantities flag flag 42 6 2 10 11 dump plasma quantities flag flag 42 6 2 10 12 dump potential flag flag 42 6 2 10 13 dump rbtheta current flag flag 42 6 2 10 14 dump rho background flag flag 43 6 2 10 15 dump steps integer 43 6 2 10 16 dump substrates_flag flag 43 6 2 10 17 dump surface depositions flag flag 43 62 10 18 dump times real voor ieee UE
9. 122 cross sections Method 4 Cross Section File 159 cross sections Particle Interaction Data File 161 cross sections Particle Interaction Input 138 cross sections poloidal angles 81 cross sections spatial function injection 116 cross sections stimulated cross section 121 cross section file definition 126 cross sections fragmentation definition 130 cross sections higherstate definition 124 CSG Computational Solid Geometry 56 CURRENT CORRECTION compiler directives 16 CURRENTS OFF compiler directives 16 cyclotron frequency particle cyclotron check DPI 50 cyclotron frequency SUBCYCLING ON 22 CYL ONE compiler directives 16 CYL R TH compiler directives 16 171 CYL R Z compiler directives 16 CYL R Z dump rbtheta current flag 42 CYL R Z scalar movie components 46 CYLINDER definitioN oooooooo 58 CYLINDER sample input 58 CYLINDRICAL compiler directives 16 CYLINDRICAL courant multiplier 30 CYLINDRICAL dump rbtheta current flag 42 CYLINDRICAL scalar movie components 46 D data formats Data Type Errors 14 data formats LSP Simulation Code 2 Data Type Errors rena e 14 Debye relaxation ferrite 94 Debye
10. Acceleration factor for the ADI field solution The value should be between 1 and 2 for stability Default 1 0 no acceleration 6 2 6 2 potential iterations integer Maximum number of iterations to be used in the static field solution when the STATIC_ FIELDS compiler directive has been defined see Section 4 4 53 STATIC FIELDS page 22 Fewer iterations will be used if convergence is reached A warning message is printed if this limit is reached without convergence Also a printout of the number of iterations used can be obtained using the print convergence flag or the iteration count can be put onto the time history file by requesting a convergence iterations probe see Section 6 25 8 Convergence Probes page 154 6 2 6 3 potential tolerance real Convergence criterion for the static field solution see Section 4 4 53 STATIC FIELDS page 22 The convergence criterion is that all non zero values of the potential must have a relative error of less than the potential tolerance value A typical value is 1 e 5 6 2 7 Particle Collision Algorithm 6 2 7 1 ionization interval integer Number of timesteps between ionization events This applies to all species that are being ionized see Section 6 17 10 ionization page 122 Default 1 6 2 7 2 scattering interval integer Number of timesteps between scattering events when the scattering model is being used see Section 4 4 48 SCATTERING ON page 21 Used for a
11. uuuuuue 11 string parameter type a 5 structure output format definition 48 structure output format sample input 48 SUBCYCLING ON compiler directives 22 subgrid models sample input 98 Subgrid Models Input 98 Subgrid Models Input USE SUBCELLS 23 substrate models sample input 99 Substrate Models Input 99 Substrate Models Input USE SUBSTRATE 23 surface deposition files dump surface depositions flag 43 surface temperature emission stimulated 114 surface temperature energy loss 81 surface temperature threshold emission 113 surface conductivity definition 74 surface_factor definition 113 surface_viscosity_flag definition 40 Symmetry Boundaries 68 symmetry boundaries sample input 68 184 LSP User s Manual and Reference symmetry direction definition 103 symmetry direction order 103 T t ntal r npn hc KINAT ERN 72 78 target_movie_interval definition 49 target_output_format definition 49 target output format sample input 49 target output format Particle Targets Input Ve dq Wake be Gosnell tee qun d MAS 143 df esc dex EG REY a BIND IANG qu 148 TEMP A MNA ies debeo iat we 148 temperature definition 74 T
12. 12 R A Vesey Effect of backscattered secondary electrons on neutral layer ionization Technical Memorandum Aug 13 1996 Sandia National Laboratories 13 D D Hinshelwood BERTHA A Versatile Transmission Line and Circuit Code NRL Memorandum Report 5185 Nov 21 1983 Naval Research Laboratory 168 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes Chapter 10 General Index 10 General Index 1 1 D coordinates CAR_ONE 0 15 1 D coordinates CYL_ONE 04 16 1 D coordinates GTid ooo o ooooccooooo 52 1 D coordinates SPH_ONE o 21 2 2 D coordinates CAR_X_Y ooooooooooo 15 2 D coordinates CAR_X_Z 0 0 essen 15 2 D coordinates CYL_R_TH 16 2 D coordinates CYL_R_Z o0 o ooooooo 16 2 D coordinates Grid ooo 52 2 D coordinates SPH_R_TH 21 2 D functions nai A et tad 145 2 D scattering sample input 81 2 D scattering method 2 000 81 3 3 D coordinates CARTESIAN 15 3 D coordinates CYLINDRICAL 16 3 D coordinates Grid ss esses esses 52 3 D coordinates SPHERICAL 22 4 4 D backscattering sample input 82 4 D backscattering method 3 82 A abort Command File 11 acceleration parameter definitio
13. input plasma input PML model input Point Probes input potentials 115 152 45 69 R E Clark and T P Hughes sample input primary output format 46 sample input purely outgoing boundary 63 sample input QUADRILATERAL 60 sample input scalar movie components 47 sample input scalar movie coordinate 47 sample input secondary 118 sample input segments 87 sample input SOLID 04 61 sample input SPHERE 005 61 sample input structure_output_format 48 sample input subgrid models 98 sample input substrate models 99 sample input symmetry boundaries 68 sample input target output format 49 sample input threshold desorption 121 sample input time bias coefficient 36 sample input time bias iterations 36 sample input title oo o o oooooo ooo 29 sample input TM wave 04 64 sample input TORUS 008 61 sample input trajectory 132 sample input TRILATERAL 60 sample input volume model 92 sample input WIRE s esses 62 sampling rate desorption definition 121 sampling rate excitation definition 12
14. 32 5 IBMESDB2 s EL Re ee ir Re 9 3 3 Startup Messages ssselsssseeesse se 10 3 4 Messages Generated By Errors in Input File 10 3 4 1 Input Parameter Errors 11 3 4 2 Boundary Errors 0 00 cece eee eee 11 3 9 Command Pile ai a xw Rhee yeh aici 11 4 Compiling LSP A9 EPA 13 4 1 Compiling on Unix and Mac OS X uusss 13 4 2 Compiling on MS Windows 00 0c esses 13 4 3 Error Messages Generated by Incorrect Compilation 14 4 3 1 Data Type ETTOTS 0 0 e ee eee eee 14 4 3 2 Unknown Compiler Directive Errors 14 4 3 3 Incompatible Compiler Directive Errors 15 4 4 Compiler Directives eee eens 15 KAN CAR ONE uz IR eti tee hens Ghee LA 15 AAD CARRY out aaa Gk Mp i tt tama 15 dA CARO KX SZ Ae urit ebur batur bx bb 15 ALAA ICARTESTAN ta deb us 15 4 4 5 CHARGE_DENSITY aasa 15 4 4 6 CHARGE_DEPOSITION 0 cee eee 15 4 4 7 COLLISIONAL_PLASMA 00 c eee eens 16 4 4 8 CURRENT CORRECTION 2 16 4 4 9 CURRENTS OPPs rere eee tee hes 16 ASANO CYL ONE ta sas 23 68 bebe ans bene moe 16 LATIN OYLIR TH ete cot serine eb DIDA iced 16 4 4 12 CYL RZ pai tae a elas vb rre eas 16 LSP User s Manual and Reference 4 4 13 4 4 14 4 4 15 4 4 16 4 4 17 4 4 18 4 4 19 4 4 20 4 4 21 4 4 22 4 4 23 4 4 24 4 4 25 4 4 26 4 4 27 4 4 28 4 4 29 4
15. 6 2 10 29 primary_output_format string Specifies the type of output format to be used in the output data dumps of primaries entering the ITS method 4 medium model This can have the values ASCII or BINARY The ASCII format is useful for reading printed output directly or for plotting with a graphical output utility such as gnuplot The BINARY format is intended for more compact files to be post processed by an appropriate utility An example is primary_output_format ASCII Default BINARY 6 2 10 30 probe_interval integer Number of timesteps between probe samples on the time history file Default 1 6 2 10 31 scalar_movie_components strings Specifies the scalar quantities to be output to the scalar movie dumps These can be selected from the following options Chapter 6 Input Variables 4T potential The electric potential which requires the STATIC FIELDS compiler directive be defined see Section 4 4 53 STATIC FIELDS page 22 charge density The total charge density which requires the CHARGE DENSITY compiler directive be defined see Section 4 4 5 CHARGE DENSITY page 15 number densities Number densities by species which requires the NUMBER DENSITIES compiler directive be defined see Section 4 4 44 NUMBER_DENSITIES page 21 energy deposition Energy deposition in a medium which requires the ENERGY DEPOSITION com piler directive be defined see Section 4 4 19 ENERGY DEPOSITION page 17 p
16. 6 5 1 BLOCK A grid conformal block In cartesian coordinates this is a rectangular region In cylin drical or spherical geometries it may appear wedge shaped The from to parameters give the lower and upper limits in each of the three coordinates respectively Coordinate system dependent shape Example 58 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes objecti BLOCK central conductor conductor on medium O potential 0 from 0 0 1 0 4 82 to 5 6 1 0 10 33 6 5 2 CONE Defines a generalized cone with a circular base whose center is at the location defined by the base parameter while the apex parameter defines the location of the apex and the edge parameter defines a point on the edge of base such that the base apex and edge points define a plane perpendicular to the plane of the base Coordinate system independent shape Example object3 CONE conical cathode conductor on medium O potential 0 base 0 0 0 0 0 0 apex 0 0 0 0 4 0 edge 1 0 0 0 0 0 6 5 3 CYLINDER Defines a cylinder with the center of the base at the base coordinates and with the specified height and radius values The cylinder s orientation is given by the polar_ angle and azimuthal_angle parameters whose format is polar anglelazimuthal angle AXIS ANGLE where AXIS can be X Y Z and the ANGLE is in degrees This orientation is performed in cartesian coordinates even if the simulation coordinates are non cartesian The
17. ITS The Integrated TIGER Series of electron photon transport codes version 3 0 IEEE Trans Nucl Sci NS 39 1025 1992 6 J A Halbleib R P Kensek T A Melhorn G D Valdez S M Seltzer and M J Berger ITS Version 3 0 The Integrated TIGER Series of Coupled Electron Photon Transport Codes SAND91 1634 Sandia National Laboratories March 1992 7 B L Henke E M Gullikson and J C Davis X ray interactions photoabsorption scattering transmission and reflection at E 50 30 000 eV Z 1 92 Atomic Data and Nucl Data Tables 54 181 1993 8 T G Jurgens A Taflove K Umashankar and T G Moore Finite Difference Time Domain Modeling of Curved Surfaces IEEE Transactions on Antennas and Propagation 40 357 1992 T G Jurgens and A Taflove Three Dimensional Contour FDTD Model ing of Scattering from Single and Multiple Bodies IEEE Transactions on Antennas and Propagation 41 1703 1993 9 P Rambo J Ambrosiano A Friedman and D E Nielsen Jr Temporal and Spatial Filtering Remedies for Dispersion in Electromagnetic Particle Codes Proc 13th Conference on the Numerical Simulation of Plasmas 1989 10 W M Sharp D A Callahan Miller A B Langdon M S Armel and J L Vay Improved modeling of chamber transport for heavy ion fusion Nucl Meth Phys Res A 464 284 2001 11 A Taflove Computational Electrodynamics Artech House 1995 p 228
18. runi 40 initialdir scratch2 mydir 46 notification always 40 notify user myname company com error lsp Cluster err output lsp Cluster out job type parallel requirements Adapter hps user 40 min processors NP 40 max processors NP HO environment MP EUILIB us MP INFOLEVEL 3 MP LABELIO yes 46 checkpoint no 40 wall clock limit HH MM SS HO account no ACCOUNT NUMBER queue 10 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes set nodes echo LOADL PROCESSOR LIST cat nodes set runid runt cp f HOME mydir lsp cp f HOME mydir runs runid lsp runid tar cvf runid tar runid dat out err compress f runid tar hpsscp runid tar Z hpss s hpss myname runid tar Z echo Job completed where NP is the number of processors HH MM SS hours mins secs is the wall time and ACCOUNT_NUMBER is the user s account 3 3 Startup Messages When LSP begins running several lines of data relating to when and where it was compiled the compiler directives used the input file name and the start time are generated An example is Compiled Sat Nov 14 12 24 57 MST 1998 on achilles Compiler flags 04 stdi warnprotos Code options defined by user DSTATIC FIELDS DMULTI PROCESS Code options defined at compile time STATIC FIELDS MULTI PROCESS Coordinate system used CARTESIAN Input data file input lsp
19. tribute to the stimulating process as long as the CHARGE DEPOSITION compiler directive has been defined see Section 4 4 6 CHARGE DEPOSITION page 15 See Section 6 16 Par ticle Species Input page 104 6 17 5 3 charge factor real optional For stimulated emission specifies the ratio of charge generated at the surface to the charge incident on the surface 6 17 6 injection The injection model introduces particles with prescribed current density and momentum from a boundary The model specific parameters are described below Generic parameters are described in Section 6 17 1 Particle Creation Parameters page 109 Example Beam injection injection from 0 0 0 0 0 0 116 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes to 0 5 0 5 0 0 normal Z interval 1 species 1 discrete numbers 1 1 1 random ON temporal function 1 Spatial function 2 radius function O drift momentum O O O Spatial momentum function 3 temporal momentum function O centroid function O centroid2 function O reference point 0 0 O spatial flags 110 radial dependence deflectionl angle 3 0 deflection2 angle 0 0 deflectionl function O deflection2 function O convergence on focal length 6 0 rotation on omega 0 09 thermal energy 9000 0 x eV slice times x 0 0 50 0 end movie tag 1 x movie fraction 0 25 x 6 17 6 1 from to real For injection these coordinates should define a plane
20. 1 0 76 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes 6 9 14 species integer optional Species identification for application of the type TENUOUS medium Available for the method 1 model only This enables the model to be applied to an ion species rather than electrons if desired In that case all electrons entering the medium are assumed to be low energy and will be absorbed automatically Note that the model will be applied to any other species present with similar charge and mass as the selected species If not specified the default value is the species designated by the PRIMARY_SPECIES compiler directive see Section 4 4 46 PRIMARY_SPECIES page 21 6 9 15 gas_density real Number density for a gaseous medium i e type TENUOUS Available for the method 0 and method 1 models only Method 4 uses the density contained on the XGEN file 6 9 16 spatial function integer optional Integer identifying the function used to specify the spatial dependence of the gas den sity Used in conjunction with the reference point and spatial flags parameters The gas density is multiplied by the spatial dependence if present when a more complex description of the density is required Otherwise the density is simply a constant value This can be a function of multiple variables corresponding to x y or z Present only for a TENUOUS medium type See Section 6 24 Functions Input page 144 Available for the method 0 an
21. 106 fluid electrons migrant species flag 106 Fluid Physics AlgorithM 0ooo o oooooooo 38 fluid migration interval definition 39 FLUID PHYSICS compiler directives 18 FLUID PHYSICS electron species 109 FLUID PHYSICS fluid migration interval 39 FLUID PHYSICS FLUID SPECIES 18 FLUID PHYSICS fluid species flag 106 FLUID PHYSICS fluid streaming factor 39 FLUID PHYSICS flux limit fraction 39 174 LSP User s Manual and Reference FLUID_PHYSICS kinetic_migration_interval a ghd eames a GNG Me TEE 39 FLUID_PHYSICS Particle Migration Input 135 FLUID_PHYSICS pdv_term_flag 39 FLUID PHYSICS scattering interval 38 FLUID SPECIES compiler directives 18 fluid species flag definition 106 fluid species flag FLUID PHYSICS 18 fluid species flag fluid streaming factor ds at A bone db ide NEA 39 fluid species flag flux limit fraction 39 fluid species flag hybrid fluid species pp DEDERE Nahe tied LEM 135 fluid species flag hybrid kinetic species Vs sauna donas d eet ec Chie tec o os 135 fluid species flag Particle Extraction Input oA A a 137 fluid_species_flag Particle Migration Input E AO AA oh ath 135 fluid_streaming_factor definition 39 fluorine 3 paan ek Be ede NG ARES 75 78 flux_limit_fraction definition 39 focal length definiti
22. 68 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes 6 6 1 12 voltage measurement real Used only if the circuit index is nonzero Gives the end points of the path to be used to measure the voltage when connecting a circuit model to an outlet boundary of the simulation The path should be between two conductors at different potentials and its direction depends upon which drive model is being used For the POTENTIAL model the path should go from lower potential to higher potential according to how the values in potentials have been assigned to the conductors For the ANALYTIC TEM model the direction is from the outer conductor to the inner conductor when COAXIAL geometry is specified and from the conductor at the higher coordinate to the conductor at the lower coordinate when FLAT geometry is specified The format is voltage measurement from X1 Y1 Z1 to X2 Y2 Z2 The path must be along a grid line i e only one coordinate value differs between the two sets 6 6 1 13 temporal function integer optional Integer which refers to the function specifying the time dependence of the voltage magni tude for the incoming wave see Section 6 24 Functions Input page 144 If a circuit model is attached to the boundary the time dependence is specified in the Circuit Models in put section and the temporal function parameter is not used here Note that in either case if the drive model is type ANALYTIC TEM the prescribed vo
23. 90 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes and its associated parameters follow the entire sequence of segments whereas for networks the termination type and its parameters directly follow the junction with which they are associated while omitting the actual termination keyword 6 10 5 capacitance real optional This specifies the capacitance of either the static circuit model or as part of the termination LCR option of the transmission line or network models 6 10 6 inductance real optional This specifies the inductance in the termination LCR option of the transmission line or network models 6 10 7 resistance real optional This specifies the resistance of either the static circuit model or as part of the termination LCR option of the transmission line or network models or any of the network junction types involving a resistance This parameter can be replaced by a resistance_function which is explained below 6 10 8 resistance function integer optional This specifies the resistance for any of the network junction types which involve resis tance as a function of time that is it may be used in place of the constant valued resistance explained above Specifically when used in conjuction with the SERIES RESISTOR junction model it acts as an opening or closing switch by defining the appropriate functional pre scription in the Functions section of input 6 10 9 voltage real optiona
24. Biles scars ccc PA 159 External Fields Input EXTERNAL_BFIELDS 17 External Fields Input EXTERNAL_EFIELDS 18 External Fields Input MAFCO Magnetic Field A cee ected Sh REOR IRE 161 External Fields Input MAG3D Magnetic Field ENeibie isl uere AA AA 160 EXTERNAL_BFIELDS compiler directives 17 EXTERNAL_BFIELDS type external field aoe ss 102 EXTERNAL_EFIELDS compiler directives 18 EXTERNAL_EFIELDS type external field Senet 102 EXTRA_MOTION compiler directives 18 extract photons flag medium definition 77 extract photons flag definition 44 extract photons flag Photon Output Data File RES de adc VERDE GUN M ERE MUN IS 162 extract primaries flag medium definition A A A RA TT extract_primaries_flag definition 44 extract_primaries_flag Primary Output Data Pl a ARENA ns e 162 173 extract_secondaries_flag medium definition Ta TP DE PUR vias iene AG A 77 extract_secondaries_flag definition 45 extraction dump interval definition A1 extraction dump interval extract photons flag 44 extraction dump interval extract primaries flag 44 extraction dump interval Photon Output Data File iincm eb we lenire a 162 extraction dump interval Primary Output Data Fillers cnc TU Neto e Lr od weise 162 extraction dump steps definition 43 extraction dump times definition
25. C2 beginning time of ramp C3 ending time of ramp 18 solenoidal magnetic field 4 coefficients CO magnitude of field at peak C1 length of solenoid C2 radius of solenoid C3 exponential falloff factor to model the presence of an iron core in units of 1 length 2 used as exp C3 x 2 set C3 0 for no core 19 analytic laser function 2 coefficients CO wavelength C1 spot size radius 20 polynomial of degree N N 1 coefficients CO C1 x C2 x72 CN x N Users may enter their own customized functions of 1 2 or 3 independent variables by using a script in Python format The rules for Python syntax can be found in the Defining Functions section of the Python Tutorial at http python fyxm net doc 2 2 3 tut tut html An example of using a Python function is as follows Note the use of script instead of an integer for this type followed by the text enclosed in parentheses The name of the defined function is arbitrary The compiler directive USE PYTHON must be defined to use this feature see Section 4 4 65 USE PYTHON page 23 Obviously the Python software must be installed on the platform being used An example of this format is functioni emulate type 2 type script def type2 x c0 c1 1 0 0 5 if x lt 0 return 0 return cO x c1 The function in this example is equivalent to the type 2 power term function mentioned above which would be written as function type 2 power term c
26. Example of the one way wave absorbing model freespace from 2 0 2 0 0 0 to 2 0 2 0 5 0 model type WAVEABC phase velocity 1 0 reference point 0 0 0 0 2 5 Example of the uniaxial perfectly matched layer PML model freespace from 2 0 2 0 0 0 to 2 0 2 0 5 0 model type UNIAXIAL number of cells 8 Example of the convolutional PML model freespace from 2 0 2 0 0 0 70 LSP User s Manual and Reference to 2 0 2 0 5 0 model_type CFSPML number_of_cells 5 R E Clark and T P Hughes Chapter 6 Input Variables 71 6 7 Potentials Input The Potentials section is used in conjunction with an electrostatic field solver The code must be compiled with the STATIC_FIELDS compiler directive or one of its variants see Section 4 4 Compiler Directives page 15 Dirichlet boundary conditions are set using the potential index associated with each object see Section 6 5 Objects Input page 56 An object with potential index N is given the value of the potentialN parameter The units of potential are dependent upon which system of units has been specified by the user see Chapter 5 User Units page 25 However if the circuit model is used or if a temporal function is used then the potential will be the product of these in combination so these values should be simply 1 The maximum number of iterations allowed is given by the potential_iterations parameter in the Control section of input
27. For charge exchange the file format is 162 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes Table of interactions for neutral H2 on p Type Num energy Charge Mass twice 200 3 672000e 03 1 836000e 03 Energy Nu cx Nu mom 690980e 02 8 536466e 20 5 575825e 21 045765e 02 9 405332e 20 5 575825e 21 oP EF HON FF for 200 energy values The first integer 2 identifies this as a charge exchange table The next two lines are the same as for the ionization table above The table of values has the following columns energy eV momentum transfer frequency due to charge exchange cm 73 cm and momentum transfer frequency due to scattering cm 3 cm For montecarlo scattering the file format is as follows Table of interactions for e on neutral He Montecarlo type Type Num energy Charge Mass twice 3 460 1 1 000000e 00 O 7 344000e 03 number of inelastic processes nproc 7 Eaniso Eioniz Bparam Delta E 1 Delta E nproc 0 000000E 00 0 246000E 02 0 000000E 00 0 198000E 02 0 240000E 02 Energy Sigma_el Sigma ioniz Sigma 1 Sigma nproc 0 000000E 00 0 495000E 15 0 000000E 00 0 000000E 00 0 000000E 00 0 100000E 00 0 579524E 15 0 000000E 00 0 000000E 00 0 000000E 00 for 460 energy values 7 10 Primary Output Data File The primary output data files have the following format for each particle WEIGHT X Y Z Vx Vy Vz where WEIGHT is the charge weight of the macro particle
28. Monte Carlo transport model extract_primaries_flag 44 Monte Carlo transport model extract_secondaries_flag 45 Monte Carlo transport model method 4 83 Monte Carlo DENSE sample input 83 Monte Carlo TENUOUS sample input 84 montecarlo_scattering_flag definition 107 movie fraction definition 111 movie tag definition 111 movies field movie components 45 movies field movie coordinate 45 movies field movie interval 45 movies hybrid fluid species movie tag 136 movies hybrid kinetic species movie tag DE AUR MEET DIEA 135 movies movie fraction ss 111 movies P4 Postprocess0or aa 3 movies particle movie components 45 movies particle movie interval 46 movies scalar move coordinate 47 movies scalar movie components 46 movies scalar movie interval 47 movies target movie interval 49 Moving Frame Algorithm 40 moving frame start time definition 40 moving frame velocity definition 40 MPI message passing interface Compiling on Unix and Mac OS X ua getoa 13 MPI message passing interface Multiple Processor Machines 7 MPI Message Passing Interface Workstation Network ita eos dee UAE 8 multi processor mac
29. SIMPLE_JUNCTION Two elements with different impedances are joined PARALLEL_RESISTOR Two elements are joined with a resistance between them in parallel The resis tance can be either a constant value or time dependent see below SERIES_RESISTOR Two elements are joined with a resistance between them in series The resis tance can be either a constant value or time dependent see below PARALLEL_TEE Three elements are joined such that all three grounds are connected to each other Known as a current adder Chapter 6 Input Variables 89 SERIES_TEE Three elements are joined such that the ground of the first element is connected to an opposing ground and the hot of the first element is connected to an opposing hot but ground is connected to hot between the second and third elements Known as a voltage adder PARALLEL_TEE_WITH_PARALLEL_RESISTOR Three elements are joined in parallel with a resistor The resistance can be either a constant value or time dependent see below FOUR_WAY Four elements are joined in parallel GRID_CONNECTION At least one of the elements should be connected to the simulation grid at an outlet boundary with matched impedance such that waves pass freely between them The code does not check for this so if no connection is made then the circuit model will run on its own without any interaction with the simulation proper TERMINATION Use one of the termination models at an end of an
30. Start time Sat Nov 14 12 27 56 1998 The code options listed are those specified by the user at compilation time see Chap ter 4 Compiling LSP page 13 These options are also referred to as compiler directives 3 4 Messages Generated By Errors in Input File When starting an LSP run a variety of error checking takes place to diagnose possible mistakes in the choice of compiler directives and the specification of input data These errors will usually cause a printed message in standard output and prevent the simulation from continuing However in some cases a warning message may occur without stopping the code from running The user should be alert for this type of occurrence Chapter 3 Running LSP 11 3 4 1 Input Parameter Errors Most of the data appearing in the input file for a simulation is syntax dependent In terpretation by the LSP code is sensitive to the spelling and order of input parameters At present the code issues an error message and exits immediately upon finding items in the input text that cannot be identified 3 4 2 Boundary Errors The user is responsible for simulation set up However LSP is able to check that at least the boundaries of each domain and therefore the entire simulation space are well defined This means that some physical boundary condition is defined everywhere at the boundaries If any cells along an outer boundary are found not to be covered by one of the conditions necessary for
31. YMIN ZMIN XMAX YMAX ZMAX are diagonally opposite corners of the volume and FILE is the name of the data file containing a series of B H hysteresis curves The format for this file is defined in the section under File Formats in Section 7 12 Hysteresis Data File page 163 When using this model the compiler directive MAGNETIC_HYSTERESIS must be defined See Section 4 4 36 MAGNETIC_HYSTERESIS page 20 In addition the B and H magnetic 96 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes fields in the model can be initially set to some values at the lower extremity of the hystere sis curve at the onset of the simulation by using the applied_current parameter in the Control section of input see Section 6 2 4 1 applied current page 34 6 11 6 paramagnetic The paramagnetic model places a magnetic permeability within the specified volume The format is volumel paramagnetic from XMIN YMIN ZMIN to XMAX YMAX ZMAX permeability MU REAL liner M temporal function N where XMIN YMIN ZMIN XMAX YMAX ZMAX are diagonally opposite corners of the volume MU_REAL is the value of the magnetic permeability The optional parameter liner is used to invoke a simple imploding liner model It specifies an integer M which refers to the linerM entry in the Liner Models section see Section 6 12 Liner Models Input page 97 The lin
32. amp log amp An NQS Network Queueing System job for NP processors can be submitted to the QUEUE queue on the Teraflop for a time HH MM SS hours mins secs using Chapter 3 Running LSP 9 qsub q QUEUE 1P NP 1T HH MM SS o log lsp script lsp where script 1sp is a shell script file An example of this file follows bin sh date cd QSUB_WORKDIR cougar bin yod 1sp opt input lsp where QSUB_WORKDIR is a shell variable which resolves to the working directory from which the qsub command is issued 3 2 4 ASCIQ On the ASCIQ system start LSP interactively using prun n NP lsp opt input lsp gt amp log amp where NP is the number of processors An LSF Load Sharing Facility job for NP processors on ND nodes can be submitted to the QUEUE queue on the ASCIQ for a time MMM min using bsub q QUEUE n NP o log 1sp W MMM prun N ND 1sp opt input lsp Each node consists of 4 processors therefore a multiple of 4 must be used for NP when submitting a job beyond 4 3 2 5 IBM SP2 On the IBM SP2 start LSP interactively using lsp procs NP opt input lsp gt amp log amp where NP is the number of processors Generally the IP switch will be used for interactive jobs At the command prompt type setenv MP EUILIB ip A LoadLeveler batch job can be submitted using llsubmit script lsp where script 1sp is a control file such as 406 job name
33. ble and charge exchange collision frequency if applicable in an external datafile These files are listed in the Particle Interaction section Ionization cross sections for col lisions between charged particles can also be specified using these files However values for the momentum transfer frequency will be ignored and the Spitzer collision rates will be used The only charge exchange collisions currently supported are those in which the products belong to the same species as the colliding particles i e the charge exchange can be treated as a momentum transfer event The code will issue a warning message for each neutral species charged species pair for which no interaction table was found e g Warning no interaction table found for species 2 5 combination To specify these files for use in a simulation the keyword interaction files must be entered followed by one or more filenames The format of these files is given in Sec tion 7 9 Particle Interaction Data File page 161 These contain the collision cross sections and momentum transfer frequencies as functions of energy for either ionization or charge exchange events Example Particle Interaction interaction files interH2H2 tab interp H2 tab interH2 H2 tab interH2p tab intereH2 tab end An alternative method involves use of internally calculated collision frequencies from the so called LMD model which can be invoked as follows Particle Interaction
34. determined by looking at the file dates In this case the file with the dat extension can be removed from the simulation directory before restarting The code will then attempt a restart from the alt file If this restart fails the dat file can be used as a backup Alternatively the ra option has the same effect as the r flag except that the restart is performed from the restart alt file instead of the restart dat file This is a more elegant way to restart from the alt file than moving or deleting the dat file Probe history data reside in the restart file and are written to the history file history p4 when the restart run begins so this file need not be preserved between restarts The user ordinarily increases one of the time_limit parameters on the input file prior to restarting a simulation unless the previous run was stopped before reaching this limit However use of the number_of_steps parameter on a restart run will cause the simulation to execute exactly that number of additional timesteps unless the time_limit is reached first The n N sequence where N is an unsigned integer will cause the code to run that number of timesteps regardless of what is specified on the input file This may be useful for checking the simulation setup without directly changing the input file The s option is used to perform initialization only and stops the run immediately regardl
35. direction and must be conformal to a grid line Example Chapter 6 Input Variables 149 current fourier probe2 voltage from 0 0 0 0 0 0 to 5 0 0 0 0 0 This measurement can be a line integral or a loop integral of magnetic field depending on how the from to parameters are defined When only one coor dinate varies it is a line integral of magnetic field along the direction of integra tion although in 2 D geometries this direction is assumed to be in the virtual dimension Output is in units of current see Chapter 5 User Units page 25 Example of line integral in 3 D cylindrical geometry probe3 current from 9 0 0 0 0 0 to 9 0 6 283 0 0 A loop integral of magnetic field is defined when the from to parameters are specified such that two coordinates vary in 3 D or one coordinate in 2 D if the virtual coordinate is not specified However the path of integration is not assumed to be along the coordinates of this loop but is measured around any conductors which appear within the loop The measurement is signed according to whether the conductor is within the loop or is a hollow outer wall but is always in the positive direction normal to the plane defined by the loop Example of loop integral in 3 D cartesian geometry probe4 current potential 2 from 0 5 0 5 1 0 to 0 5 0 5 1 0 where the optional potential parameter isolates the measurement exclusively to conductors which have been assigned that potential
36. dump interval page 41 Default OFF 6 2 10 17 dump surface depositions flag flag If dump surface depositions flag is ON output accumulated surface charge temper ature and or energy deposited by particles the compiler directives CHARGE DEPOSITION KELVIN DEPOSITION and or ENERGY DEPOSITION must be on periodically to surface de position dumps see Section 4 4 Compiler Directives page 15 These can be viewed with the P4 postprocessor see Section 1 3 P4 Postprocessor page 3 If no depositions are invoked with a compiler directive no files are written These files are dumped at intervals given by the diagnostic dump interval or its associated parameters see Section 6 2 10 7 dump interval page 41 Default OFF 44 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes 6 2 10 18 dump times real Specifies discrete times at which dumps are output These dumps will be produced in addition to those generated by any of the regular intervals used Options for this parameter are dump times Times in user units at which output dumps are desired dump times ns Times in ns at which output dumps are desired dump_times_cm Times in units of 1 cm c where c is the velocity of light at which output dumps are desired The list of times is terminated by an end keyword e g dump_times_ns 0 5 2 0 10 0 30 0 end Dump times for field particle extraction and diagnostic data can be specified inde p
37. generated on a multiple processor Unix computer and viewed on a different platform e g a PC or Macintosh The time history data file is an ASCII text file and so is also portable Output can be examined using the P4 postprocessor see Section 1 3 P4 Postprocessor page 3 which is written in the IDL language Research Systems Inc The design of LSP was begun in June 1995 by Tom Hughes Ren Yao and Bob Clark under a DOE SBIR contract to investigate parallelization of particle methods Currently LSP is maintained by Bob Clark Tom Hughes and Dale Welch The code is licensed by Mission Research Corporation for commercial GSA and academic users 1 2 GLSP Preprocessor GLSP is a point and click preprocessor for LSP It functions as a tool to create a model while enabling 3 D visualizatin of the spatial elements Values can be entered as symbolic expressions allowing parametric specification of geometry etc GLSP is the primary source of data entry and manipulation for LSP An LSP simulation can be and generally is launched from GLSP or the input data created within GLSP can be exported to a remote platform using an in built FTP client The P4 graphical postprocessor can also be launched from GLSP GLSP is written with C and Tcl Tk and uses OpenGL to render the objects in 3D space 1 R L Yao T P Hughes and R E Clark Parallelization of Smooth Particle Hydrodynamics on a Distributed Memory Multiprocessor Computer M
38. integer optional 67 6 6 1 11 connection rank integer optional 67 6 6 1 12 voltage measurement real 68 6 6 1 13 temporal function integer optional 68 6 6 1 14 frequency real optional 68 6 6 1 15 time delay real optional 68 6 6 2 Symmetry Boundarles ooooocococccccoo 68 6 6 3 Periodic Boundaries lid 69 6 6 4 Freespace Boundaries o o ooocoooomoooo 69 6 7 Potentials Input 71 6 8 Materials INput 0 aaa i eee eens 72 6 9 Medium Models Input 02 e cee eee eee ee 73 6 9 1 method mtrs ada 73 a AA A tae es 73 6 9 3 dielectric_constant real optional 73 6 9 4 surface conductivity real optional 74 6 9 5 permeability real optional 74 6 9 6 zero forces flag flag optional 74 6 9 7 density real c ri thee weed A pai 74 6 9 8 transparency real optional 74 6 9 9 temperature real optional 74 6 9 10 gas material string rr me 75 6 9 11 air model string optional 75 6 9 12 water content real optional 75 6 9 13 diffusion length real optional 75 6 9 14 species integer optional 76 R E Clark and T P Hughes 6 9 15 gas density real Luo cus coy eve Ren 76 6 9 16 spatial function integer optional
39. on the extraction dump interval or its related control parameters Chapter 6 Input Variables 45 6 2 10 22 extract secondaries flag flag If extract secondaries flag is ON output secondaries produced by the Monte Carlo transport model to a binary file A method 4 medium model must be active for this to happen The resulting data is used only for creation of secondaries within the simulation and is not intended for post processing as the data is lost after secondary particle creation See Section 6 17 Particle Creation Input page 108 Default OFF 6 2 10 23 field movie components strings Specifies the field components to be output to the field movie dumps These can be EX EY EZ BX BY BZ JX JY JZ SX SY SZ where E represents electric field B magnetic field J current density and S conductivity An example is field movie components Ex Ez By 6 2 10 24 field movie coordinate string amp real Specifies the direction normal to the plane from which data are extracted from a 3 D simulation to make a 2 D field component movie and the coordinate value of the plane The direction can be X Y Z This parameter is ignored in 1 D or 2 D simulations An example is field movie coordinate Y 3 14 6 2 10 25 field movie interval integer Options for this parameter are field movie interval Number of timesteps between field movie frames field movie interval time Interval in user units between field movie frames fi
40. optional A multiplier applied to the surface fields at emission cells prior to calculating the emitted charge For standard Child Langmuir emission the value is 2 3 Default 2 3 6 17 3 emission field limited Field limited emission is a variant of the Child Langmuir model where instead of emit ting enough current to reduce the field at the surface to zero the code emits enough current to reduce the surface field to the threshold value This model was developed for the PBFA II lithium ion source Generic parameters are described in Section 6 17 1 Particle Creation Parameters page 109 Example emission field limited from 4 05 0 0 0 0 to 6 90 6 283 0 05 interval 8 Species 2 lithium ions random off medium O threshold 6000 0 charge_factor 1 0 surface_factor 1 0 thermal_energy 0 0 movie_tag 3 movie_fraction 0 1 114 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes 6 17 4 emission source limited Source limited emission is the same as Child Langmuir emission but does not allow more than the specified source_current_density to be produced Generic parameters are described in Section 6 17 1 Particle Creation Parameters page 109 Example emission source limited from 1 0 1 0 0 0 to 1 0 1 0 0 0 interval 1 species 1 discrete_numbers 2 2 1 random off medium O threshold 0 1 charge_factor 1 0 surface_factor 1 0 thermal energy 0 0 source_current_density
41. page 104 and DIR is the direction of particle motion X Y Z The dqdt measurement type is not meaningful for particle slice probes 6 25 5 Global Particle Probes Global particle probes sum data over all the particles of a selected species The format is global TYPE species SP where TYPE is one of the types from the table below and SP is the species index see Section 6 16 Particle Species Input page 104 The quantities vxtot vytot vztot and ketot are weighted by the particle weights The available types are number Total number of macro particles in the simulation charge Total amount of charge contained in the simulation vxtot Total normalized momentum gamma beta in the x direction of the simulation vytot Total normalized momentum gamma beta in the y direction of the simulation vztot Total normalized momentum gamma beta in the z direction of the simulation ketot Total kinetic energy contained in the simulation joules or ergs ocmax Maximum value of the cyclotron frequency times the time step unitless opmax Maximum value of the plasma frequency times the time step unitless Note The NUMBER_DENSITIES compiler directive must be defined in order to use this probe see Section 4 4 44 NUMBER_DENSITIES page 21 154 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes 6 25 6 Global Energy Probes Global energy probes take integrated energy measurements over the entire sim
42. photon cutoff energy 1 0e4 eV components 84 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes aluminum fraction 1 0 end Example of a tenuous gas medium using Monte Carlo transport model Medium Models medium1 method 4 type TENUOUS conductivity on electron_density 5 0e8 temperature 300 xgen_data_file KrF dat photon_cutoff_energy 3 0e3 3 keV components argon fraction 0 95 krypton fraction 0 045 fluorine fraction 0 005 end 6 9 34 1 xgen_data_file string The file containing the electron energy loss and scattering data for the material The format for this table is that produced by the XGEN program which is part of the Integrated Tiger Series codes see Section 7 3 Method 4 Cross Section File page 159 xgen_data_file xgen dat 6 9 34 2 photon_cutoff_energy real Specifies the photon cutoff energy in eV Chapter 6 Input Variables 85 6 10 Circuit Models Input The Circuit Models section of the input file specifies the parameters of lumped element circuit models which serve as adjuncts to the main part of the calculation in the defined simulation space Three types of circuit model are available The first is the static type and is used in conjunction with the iterative electrostatic field solver The second is the transmission line type and is attached to the simulation grid at an outlet boundary The third is the network type which enables configuration of more complexity and is also atta
43. recycle time 0 0 movie tag O x movie fraction 0 0 6 17 16 1 from to real For the fileread model these coordinates should define a plane and the normal pa rameter should be set to XIYIZ to give the direction of injection 6 17 16 2 particle data file string Name of the file containing the explicit particle data to be used for injection The format of this file is given in Section 7 8 Fileread Particle File page 161 particle data file slice dat 6 17 16 3 temporal function integer Integer identifying the function used to specify the time dependence of the beam but only as a way of turning it off or on and does not otherwise affect the beam current see Section 6 24 Functions Input page 144 6 17 16 4 recycle time real Time on the data file from which data is recycled once the end of file has been reached If this has a value of zero which is the default then subsequent particle creation proceeds from the beginning of the file 6 17 17 fission The fission model improves particle statistics by periodically splitting particles of a certain species into smaller ones The resulting particles are separated and located at the surrounding cell nodes or cell centers when the EXTENDED PARTICLES compiler directive is defined Thus the number of particles resulting from this process depends on the number of 132 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes real dimensions in the simulati
44. sigma VALUE temporal function M Spatial function N reference point RX RY RZ spatial_flags LX LY LZ where COMP is the electric field component X Y Z affected XMIN YMIN ZMIN and XMAX YMAX ZMAX are diagonally opposite corners of the volume VALUE is the conduc tivity value and M is the function index specifying the time dependence of the conduc tivity multiplier see Section 6 24 Functions Input page 144 Additional options include a spatially dependent function which also acts as a conductivity multiplier the reference point for that spatial dependence and three logical flags set to zeros or ones indicating which coordinates are dependent upon the spatial function These must be present if the spatial function index is non zero Any use of spatial dependence in the conductivity model requires the USE CONDUCTIVITY compiler directive be defined See Section 4 4 61 USE CONDUCTIVITY page 23 Caution must be taken when applying the conductivity model over a volume containing dielectric material In that case the user must use a value of sigma that has been divided by the relative dielectric constant which has been applied to the volume However when both USE CONDUCTIVITY and USE PERMITTIVITY compiler directives have been defined this is not the case as the permittivity of the dielectric is correctly accounted for in the conductivity of the overlapping volume The units of condu
45. the USE OHMIC TERMS compiler directive must be defined see Section 4 4 62 USE OHMIC TERMS page 23 6 9 20 electron density real optional The E p model E is the electric field strength p is the gas pressure used to model avalanche breakdown for the calculation of conductivity requires a seed population of free electrons This parameter gives the initial free electron number density Present only for a TENUOUS medium type At present the spatial dependence function if present is applied to the electron density in the same way as the gas density above Default 1 0e3 6 9 21 polar_angle string amp real optional Specifies the polar axis and the polar angle in degrees at which the surface normal is tilted with respect to that axis A value of zero means that the surface normal is in the direction of the polar axis A value of 180 means that the surface normal is opposite to the direction of that axis The user must ensure that the angle is consistent with the actual simulation geometry AXIS can take the values XIY Z In cylindrical coordinates rotation about the Y axis is not defined This parameter is required for method 2 and method 3 and is optional and ignored for method 1 and method 4 The format is polar angle AXIS ANGLE 6 9 22 azimuthal angle string amp real optional Specifies the azimuthal angle in degrees at which the surface normal is rotated around the polar axis measured from the azimuthal
46. the X Y Z coordinates are in cm and the V s are the gamma beta velocity components The data can be spread onto discrete files depending on the extraction_dump_interval or its related control parameters The resulting files will have names like primNNNN dat where NNNN is the timestep on which the data is finalized If no dump interval or dump time is specified all of the data will remain on a file named primaries dat 7 11 Photon Output Data File The photon output data files have the following format for each photon Chapter 7 File Formats 163 WEIGHT ENERGY X Y Z Vx Vy Vz where WEIGHT is the charge weight of the originating macro particle ENERGY is in MeV the X Y Z coordinates are in cm and the V s are actually the unit direction vector components The data can be spread onto discrete files depending on the extraction_ dump_interval or its related control parameters The resulting files will have names like photNNNN dat where NNNN is the timestep on which the data is finalized If no dump interval or dump time is specified all of the data will remain on a file named photons dat 7 12 Hysteresis Data File The hysteresis data file contains a series of B H curves used for the hysteresis volume model see Section 6 11 Volume Models Input page 92 The file format is as follows B H curves for metglas smoothed trapezoidal functions number of dB dt values 6 number of data points
47. voltage_measurement from 10 0 0 0 0 0 to 5 0 0 0 0 0 Circuit Models circuiti transmission line segments length 10 0 impedance 2 3 dielectric constant 1 0 length 5 0 impedance 60 7 dielectric constant 1 0 end termination voltage application voltage function 1 startup time 0 0 frequency 0 0 impedance product function O Boundary conditions for the initial end of the transmission line model can be defined by use of the termination parameter The other end of the transmission line is the one which is connected to the simulation grid at an outlet boundary See the section below on the termination parameter for the various types of boundary condition available Example using the LCR model Circuit Models circuiti segments length 40 0 impedance 1 9 end termination LCR capacitance 105 0 nF inductance 21 0 nH resistance 0 2 ohm voltage 250 startup time 1 3 Example using the liner model Circuit Models circuiti segments length 8 0 impedance 13 5 end termination liner 1 The network type of circuit model is more general in allowing construction of loops and other configurations which are beyond the capabilities of a simple transmission line The modeling for network circuits was adapted from the BERTHA code Ref 13 Example Chapter 6 Input Variables 87 Circuit Models circuiti network elements 1 transit_time 0 1 impedance 0 1 2 transit_time 1 0 impedance 0 2 transit_time 1 0
48. 10 6 2 4 9 electric spatial filtering parameter real Mi atu vs T a te te 35 6 2 4 10 field advance flag flag 35 6 2 4 11 field initialization flag flag 35 6 2 4 12 ion conductivity factor real 35 6 2 4 13 magnetic force filtering parameter real dU Galak dsl d e e eR lsd deno a a T ou T alk od ded b 35 6 2 4 14 magnetic spatial filtering parameter real EE 36 6 2 4 15 small radius exclusion real 36 6 2 4 16 time bias coefficient real 36 6 2 4 17 time bias iterations integer 36 6 2 4 18 temporal filtering parameter real 36 Implicit Field Algorithm 37 6 2 5 1 error current filtering parameter real 37 6 2 5 2 implicit acceleration parameter real 37 6 2 5 3 implicit iterations integer 37 6 2 5 4 implicit omega_min_factor real 37 6 2 5 5 implicit subcycles integer 37 6 2 5 6 implicit tolerance real 38 Static Field Algorithm 00 38 6 2 6 1 acceleration parameter real 38 6 2 6 2 potential iterations integer 38 6 2 6 3 potential tolerance real 38 Particle Collision Algorithm 38 6 2 7 1 ionization interval integer 38 6 2 7 2 scattering interval integer 38 Fluid Physics Algorithm 04 38 6 2 8 1 fluid migration interval integer
49. 131 Functions Input temporal_function injection oP tlt eine ey a 116 Functions Input temporal_momentum_function n a eee 117 Functions Input type external field 101 Functions Input USE PYTHON 23 Functions Input voltage function 90 G gas conductivity model 75 76 79 gas conductivity model sample input 79 gas density definition 76 gas material definition 75 geometry definition 00000 67 geometry inner_radius 67 geometry Objects Input 57 geometry outer radius 67 Global Energy Probes aa 154 Global Medium Probes 154 Global Particle Probes 153 GLSP Preprocessor aaa 2 GLSP Preprocessor PerLeval Preprocessor 165 GLSP Preprocessor Renumber Utility 165 Bold eue LL e a I 72 78 Grid Input Seeds e 52 Grid Input drive_model 66 Grid Input Particle Diagnostics Input 140 Chapter 10 General Index grid 3 D simulation with non uniform spacing sample input cid REIR 53 guard cells Boundaries Input 63 guard cells Objects Input 56 guard cells secondary 118 H E 148 A Le eei 75 78 Henke data tables oooo oooooo oooo 126 higherstate definition
50. 4 30 4 4 31 4 4 32 4 4 33 4 4 34 4 4 35 4 4 36 4 4 37 4 4 38 4 4 39 4 4 40 4 4 41 4 4 42 4 4 43 4 4 44 4 4 45 4 4 46 4 4 47 4 4 48 4 4 49 4 4 50 4 4 51 4 4 52 4 4 53 4 4 54 4 4 55 4 4 56 4 4 57 4 4 58 4 4 59 4 4 60 CYLINDRICAL a aa e eae Gea Ea 16 DELAY_BREAKDOWN 0 0 00 n ne 16 DESORPTION ON 0 maa riunn bau b eb em xm 16 DIRECT IMBBhLIGLDT eim tet Rees 16 DOUBLE PRECISION 2 17 DYNAMIC FTIELBDS is salad Pg ieee bie KANAN erna As 17 ENERGY DEPOSITION atei pe i aa ane eid a 17 EXACT IMPETGTT as eue REDE EA h 17 EXTENDED PARTICLES peu 6er eds 17 EXTERNAL BFIELDS enient tant a e eag 17 EXTERNAL EETELDS 2 Lut Reni NAN Da 18 EXTRA MOTI ON imber e 18 FLUID PHYSTUOS bene bebe eere a 18 ELUID SPEGLESFE 2G EE CERE EA 18 EREESPAGE PME 2 hose Sc aii NAIA CUP 18 FRICTIONAL EFFECTS 2am d 9 d Rege 18 FULL SUSCEPTIBILITY eeeeeee ess 19 IMPEICITT FIELDS ecoin at darla 19 INTER DOMAIN TRACKING eese eee 19 IONIZATION ON eit ne IRR eani 19 KELVIN DEPOSITION 00 00 0 19 EONG EONG TNT en be cei Ok ENIM e e 19 MAGNETIC DISPERSION 22 esses 20 MAGNETIC HYSTERESIS 2 22 20 MAGNETOSTATIGC a sa aa mette ie 20 MAGNETOSTATIC FFT2D o 20 MAX RESONANCES 0 000000 c cece eee eee 20 MAX SPECIES T Lieu a NAINA NAA lens 20 MULTI PROCESS 2 eiecit hr en emi 20 MUTABLE OSPECTESZTH 1iw lReLLUEellll eR 20 NO PARTICLE
51. 6 25 8 Convergence Probes Convergence probes are an easy way to gauge how well the simulation is performing in the various iterative solution techniques available These include the static electric field solution the magnetostatic solution and any of the implicit solutions The format is simply Chapter 6 Input Variables 155 convergence TYPE where TYPE is one of the types from the table below The available types are iterations The iteration count after either convergence or reaching the maximum epsilon The final value of the convergence criterion measurement after either conver gence or the maximum iteration count is reached residue The final value of the residue measurement if the field solution is one of the static potential types or the convergence rate if the field solution is electromagnetic ADI 6 25 9 Performance Probes The single performance probe available is a measure of the CPU time used to complete a timestep The format is simply performance cpu_time 6 25 10 Circuit Model Probes Circuit model probes extract measurements from any circuit model present The format is circuit N element L TYPE where N is the circuit index L is the element number and TYPE is one of the following voltage voltage at the initial end of a network element or a transmission line segment current current in a network element or a transmission line segment in the direction from the initial en
52. 6 9 Medium Models Input page 73 The method 2 medium model was developed for a foil target that is being bombarded by a monoenergetic primary electron beam see Section 4 4 46 PRIMARY SPECIES page 21 The foil medium must be a solid material Both electron and positron secondaries may be treated This model does NOT produce secondaries in guard cells See Section 6 9 32 nethod 2 page 81 For the method 4 medium model there is no restriction on the incident electron energy or on the shape of the target Only electron secondaries can be treated This model does allow secondary electron production in guard cells See Section 6 9 34 nethod 4 page 83 The model specific parameters are described below Generic parameters are described in Section 6 17 1 Particle Creation Parameters page 109 Example secondary from 0 0 0 0 5 0 to 3 0 3 0 5 05 interval 1 Species 2 movie tag 2 SpeciesA 3 movie tag 3 medium 1 movie fraction 1 0 Chapter 6 Input Variables 119 6 17 7 1 from to real For the secondary model these coordinate parameters describe a volume of the sim ulation space over which the model is applied The cells within this volume which can cause particle creation are solid material cells only associated with a method 2 or method 4 medium model 6 17 7 2 speciesA integer optional Integer identifying the secondary positron species for method 2 medium only See Section 6 16 Particle
53. 76 6 9 17 reference point real optional 76 6 9 18 spatial flags flag optional 76 6 9 19 conductivity flag optional 76 6 9 20 electron density real optional TT 6 9 21 polar angle string amp real optional TT 6 9 22 azimuthal angle string amp real optional TT 6 9 23 extract photons flag flag optional TT 6 9 24 extract primaries flag flag optional TT 6 9 25 extract secondaries flag flag optional TT 6 9 26 collision energies integer 78 6 9 27 minimum energy real oooooooooo o 78 6 9 28 maximum energy real a 78 6 9 29 components string i iso Ver panahanan 78 6 38 30 method 0 as ei e 79 50 9 E method T at a cheated re RU ie 79 6 9 31 1 thickness real optional 80 6 9 31 2 scattering la lucrar oe vend es 81 6 9 31 3 scatter angles integer 81 6 9 31 4 poloidal angles integer 81 6 9 31 5 senergy loss lag acon as ex DEI oed 81 6 932 BELO Dro maa eed est oe Done kba Ek oet Man 81 6 9 32 1 primary probability real 82 6 9 32 2 electron probability real 82 6 9 32 3 positron probability real 82 6 9 32 4 primary data file string 82 6 9 32 5 electron data file string 82 6 9 32 6 positron data file string 82
54. 8 temporal function integer 126 6 17 12 9 cross section file string 126 6 17 13 plasma ugn e rene asp care whale 127 6 17 13 1 from to Peal eden bet ve PO ota 127 6 17 13 2 density function integer 127 6 17 13 3 momentum function integer optional Eu rect dace te ET RR V redd e ae de t yale a RUE RE RR DS 127 6 17 13 4 x dependent function integer optional Em 128 6 17 13 5 y dependent function integer optional CANA es foi atid aS arat utl e ua efe AAA 128 6 17 13 6 z dependent function integer optional AN Dec done Des 128 6 17 13 7 density flags flag 128 6 17 13 8 momentum flags flag 128 6 17 13 9 Ka NALULONG 128 6 17 13 10 random energy function integer optional ias id 129 6 17 14 excl cba A a 129 6 18 6 19 6 20 6 21 6 22 6 23 6 24 6 25 6 17 14 1 from to real oco ees etus 129 6 17 14 2 conversion rate real 129 6 17 14 3 temporal function integer optional Dd ipu aah ay KNANG gs NA D 129 6 17 14 4 sampling rate real optional 129 6 17 15 fragmentation sssee esses eee 130 6 17 15 1 from to Peal ease eh wade era Ret 130 6 17 15 2 first product species integer 130 6 17 15 3 second product species integer 130 6 17 15 4 cross sections real 130 GET IOs DHGPO T uud recia led rd rae 130 6 17 16 1 from to real ois iex eine tees 131 6 17 16 2
55. Hughes 4 4 69 USE_XSEC Enable use of the ITS method 4 medium model see Section 6 9 34 method 4 page 83 which may not be available in all releases of the LSP code It is restricted to users who have an ITS licence 4 4 70 VOLUME_WEIGHTING Use volume weighting rather than linear for particle contributions to charge densities and currents when a cylindrical coordinate system is being used Chapter 5 User Units 5 User Units The system of units used for input and output values can be set at compile time to one of three different conventions See Section 4 4 Compiler Directives page 15 Two of them are the standard mks and cgs SI units The third one offered is the native LSP user units which is the default condition The latter has been found to be very practical for running simulations All physical quantities mentioned in this manual are in user units unless otherwise specified 5 1 5 3 LSP Units CNN PEE gram MG UM tM a ES nanosecond Length A A A A AE A A iR RL centimeter Charge La des ca Ri Da De E KM ie a microcoulomb o ou euros A ampere potential cm Su E NAG dag al atis can kilovolt electric field aiii AAA 3S kilovolt per cm magnetic field 2 221 i1 cs cnc ates dus aeui etes te anh og lad gauss field energy el A E tea RR Ape oet er ka DA joule particle energy cercle ehh han electron volt temperature aia ee Rote ande a apu mass op ues anes kelvin resistans i NG VE XXe ES RN AUR E Nx
56. If scattering is ON apply multiple scattering to particles passing through the medium 6 9 31 3 scatter angles integer Number of scattering angles to compute for each energy see Section 6 9 26 collision_ energies page 78 These angles are used to form a lookup table 6 9 31 4 poloidal angles integer Number of poloidal angles to use There is no poloidal dependence in the scattering cross section this number is used to compute sines and cosines of poloidal angles which can be selected randomly when generating scattered values 6 9 31 5 energy loss flag If energy loss is ON apply energy loss model to particles passing through the medium This option is required to generate surface temperatures or measurable energy deposition 6 9 32 method 2 Applies user supplied scattering tables to a monoenergetic primary electron beam inci dent on a solid material It is useful in treating large angle scattering e g backscattering from a foil and secondary emission of electrons and positrons The scattering tables and probabilities can be computed from the Integrated Tiger Series codes Ref 5 The format for these tables is given in Section 7 1 Method 2 Scattering File page 157 The monoen ergetic primary electron species is species1 or the species designated by the PRIMARY SPECIES compiler directive see Section 4 4 46 PRIMARY SPECIES page 21 The parameters associated with this model are described below Example of a m
57. N are given the properties of that medium The parameters associated with a medium are described below 6 9 1 method integer A variety of different medium models are available to the user which are differentiated by the method specified These are indicated by the numerals 0 through 4 and are explained in their individual sections below Briefly the methods are as follows method 0 Used to indicate the presence of dielectrics or gas conductivity models method 1 Analytic approximations for scattering and energy loss method 2 Mono energetic scattering and secondary emission on foils using lookup tables method 3 Backscattering of primaries and secondaries on solid materials using lookup tables method 4 Monte Carlo transport techniques for scattering energy loss and photon gen eration using the ITS kernel Ref 5 6 9 2 type string This is a sub classification of some of the medium methods which modifies the way that particles within the medium are treated This can take the values DENSE or TENUOUS The DENSE option is used to model objects such as thin foils through which particles can pass or solid thick boundaries which particles strike and are then either absorbed or backscattered An important use of the DENSE model is to compute the heating of a surface The effect on the particles is determined by the medium method being used and its various parameters described in their sections below The TENUO
58. P Hughes Chapter 4 Compiling LSP 13 4 Compiling LSP 4 1 Compiling on Unix and Mac OS X A makefile called Makefile is used to compile LSP System dependent parameters and compiler directives are placed in a file makedef Makefile calls madedef Sample versions of makedef currently exist for e computers running Linux with the MPICH version of MPI installed makedef linux e computers running Mac OS X 10 2 or later recommended with the MPICH version of MPI installed makedef macosx e DEC Alpha computer with the MPICH version of MPI installed makedef alpha e DEC 8400 cluster makedef sn1 e Intel TeraF lop at SNL makedef tflop e ASCIQ system at LANL requires MPI Default module makedef asciq To compile LSP on a particular computer copy the appropriate file to makedef no extension Then edit makedef inserting the desired compiler directives see Section 4 4 Compiler Directives page 15 into the PFLAGS definition e g Preprocessor options PFLAGS DCYL_R_Z DEXTERNAL_BFIELDS DKELVIN_DEPOSITION DMULTI_PROCESS Now type make Make calls Makefile If compiler directives are changed type make new which is equivalent to make clean followed by make Makefile may include commands to create documentation These are referred to as targets These targets include lsp info Creates GNU Info files from the Texinfo
59. SCATTERING_ON page 21 has been invoked This option is particularly useful in the direct implicit algorithm when the product of the species plasma frequency and timestep is large Numerical cooling will occur in this case if the species is treated kineticly Default OFF 6 16 5 migrant species flag flag optional Indicates which electron species are treated as migrating species for the hybrid plasma migration model which is an optional feature of the fluid physics portion of the collisional plasma scattering model Only particles which belong to a species which has been designated as a migrant species have the ability to transform into one of the opposite type That is kinetic type electrons become fluid electron species and vice versa This process is described in the Particle Migration section of input see Section 6 19 Particle Migration Input page 135 Default ON 6 16 6 implicit species flag flag optional Indicates which species undergo implicit advancement in the particle kinematics The DIRECT IMPLICIT compiler directive must be defined in order for this option to be relevant see Section 4 4 16 DIRECT IMPLICIT page 16 Default ON 6 16 7 particle motion flag flag optional For species with particle motion flag set to OFF the particle positions never change This may be useful for analysis of pure scattering phenomena Default ON 6 16 8 particle forces option string optional Selects t
60. a direction different from that of the defined momentum component itself This parameter is set to zero if not required 6 17 13 5 y dependent function integer optional Integer identifying the function used to specify the spatial dependence of the particle momenta as a function of the y coordinate relative to the value in the reference point parameter This function is used as a multiplier of any momentum components defined by either the drift momentum or the momentum function parameters and is only required in cases where it is necessary to vary the particle momenta in a direction different from that of the defined momentum component itself This parameter is set to zero if not required 6 17 13 6 z dependent function integer optional Integer identifying the function used to specify the spatial dependence of the particle momenta as a function of the z coordinate relative to the value in the reference point parameter This function is used as a multiplier of any momentum components defined by either the drift momentum or the momentum function parameters and is only required in cases where it is necessary to vary the particle momenta in a direction different from that of the defined momentum component itself This parameter is set to zero if not required 6 17 13 7 density flags flag A set of flags for each of the dimensions X Y Z with ON or OFF values indicating the coordinates on which the density function is dependent If a
61. a movie tag for the hybrid kinetic species to replace any existing tags that individual particles had before migration 136 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes 6 19 4 hybrid_fluid_species_movie_tag integer The hybrid_fluid_species_movie_tag parameter designates a movie tag for the hybrid_fluid_species to replace any existing tags that individual particles had before migration 6 19 5 transition_ratio real The ratio of electron kinetic energy to the electron thermal energy at which migration between fluid and kinetic species occurs A kinetic electron whose energy falls below this ratio is transformed into a fluid electron and vice versa Default 10 0 Chapter 6 Input Variables 137 6 20 Particle Extraction Input The Particle Extraction section allows the user to dump particles passing through a grid conformal plane to a file for further processing Requests for this data are numbered consecutively by appending an integer index to the extract keyword The format is extractN species SP direction DIR maximum_number NUMBER start_time START stop_time STOP at XYZ where N is 1 2 SP is the species index see Section 6 16 Particle Species Input page 104 DIR is the direction of particle motion and can be XIYIZ NUMBER is the maximum number of particles to accumulate and START and STOP are the simulation times at which accumulation starts and stops T
62. and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes end where T1 is the transit time of the element and Z1 is the impedance of the element Lengths may be used instead of transit times Note that here each element is numbered for identification and are not necessarily order dependent unlike transmission line segments which are order dependent Also for convenience instead of a characteristic impedance any element can be indicated as a lumped capacitor or inductor by using the keywords capacitance or inductance In either case the transit time keyword and value may be omitted and if present are ignored and treated as zero 6 10 3 junctions Defines the configuration of the network specifying how the elements are linked together by using the format junctions RESISTIVE_LOAD 1 SIMPLE_JUNCTION 1 2 GRID_CONNECTION 2 end which is a list describing the type of junction and identifying the elements by index number that are to be associated at these junctions The junction types available and their definition are as follows VOLTAGE_APPLICATION An end of an element is a matched termination where a voltage is to be applied from an infinite source A voltage_function should be supplied in the input sequence after the element identifier RESISTIVE_LOAD An end of an element is terminated with a resistance The resistance can be either a constant value or time dependent see below and is specified after the element identifier
63. as a pair of lower and upper range val ues The values entered determine the full extent of the diagnostic however the user can susbstitute either value with the literal string auto automatic or default which causes the range to be determined by the data itself This can be useful when the user does not have a way to anticipate what the data will look like or when the data changes radically from one dump time to another Multiple particle species can be included in a given measurement if desired The only restriction on these diagnostics is that the spatial extent of the independent variable must be contained within a single grid instance see Sec tion 6 3 Grid Input page 52 Data dumps for these diagnostics are written at intervals given by the diagnostic_dump_interval or its associated parameters see Section 6 2 10 7 dump interval page 41 The available diagnostic types are qsum Total charge summed through the plane at each grid point xbar ybar zbar Average of particle X Y Z coordinates xrms yrms zrms Root mean square average of particle X Y Z coordinates radrms Root mean square average of particle distance from the axis of measurement vxbar vybar vzbar Average of particle X Y Z momenta gamma beta vxrms vyrms vzrms Root mean square average of X Y Z momenta gamma beta emittance Normalized 2D transverse Lapostolle emittance in units of length radians emitx emity emitz No
64. can have the values ASCII or BINARY The ASCII format is useful for reading printed output directly or for plotting with a graphical output utility such as gnuplot The BINARY format is intended for examination using the P4 postprocessor see Section 1 3 P4 Postprocessor page 3 The ASCII format file names will have the suffix dat to distinguish them from the BINARY versions which will have the extension p4 An example is target output format BINARY Default BINARY 6 2 11 Numerical Checks and Reports 6 2 11 1 domain boundary check flag If domain boundary check is ON checks boundary cells to ensure that a boundary con dition has been set If cells without boundary conditions are found the simulation stops with a printed message indicating the area which is at fault Default ON 50 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes 6 2 11 2 particle cyclotron check flag If particle cyclotron check is ON all particles are examined to ensure that their cyclotron frequency does not exceed the orbital limit for the timestep being used about 1 6th of a complete orbit When a violation occurs the simulation stops with a message indicating the domain which is at fault Default OFF 6 2 11 3 particle motion check flag If particle motion check is ON all particles are examined to ensure that their linear motion in one timestep does not exceed cell sizes When a violation occurs the simulation stop
65. conducting walls The reference point parameter gives the location of the waist of the beam usually within the simulation space Two other important parameters are actually the coefficients associated with the special type 19 function designed specifically for this model These are the wavelength and the gaussian radius at the waist The characteristic radius at the outlet can be found from w L w2 1 17 22 where L is the distance from the waist to the boundary opening wo is the gaussian radius and zo is given by Zo 1 A WARNING For this model when using 3 d cylindrical coordinates the components and phases parameters are used in a cartesian sense This allows full control of the polarization linear to circular Also for this case the x and y values of the reference_point must be zero The from to coordinates remain cylindrical The parameters associated with an outlet boundary are described below in the order in which they appear in the input file 6 6 1 1 from to real The parameters from to specify the lower and upper limits of the outlet area The area should completely cover the opening 66 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes 6 6 1 2 phase velocity real optional Phase velocity of waves going through boundary normalized to c The value is usually 1 unless the boundary is in a dielectric medium The default value is 1 6 6 1 3 no absorption flag optional If no a
66. described in Section 6 17 1 Particle Creation Parameters page 109 As an example this type of emission was used to model the production of ions through beam impact ionization from a surface where a neutral layer was desorbed through beam heating of the surface In this case the charge factor is given by the ionization cross section times the areal density of the desorbed layer Example Chapter 6 Input Variables 115 emission stimulated from 0 0 0 15 1 45 to 0 15 0 15 1 65 interval 30 species 2 ions stimulating species 1 random OFF medium O threshold 400 0 kelvins charge factor 0 01 surface factor 1 0 thermal energy 0 0 minimum charge 0 0 movie tag 1 movie fraction 0 2 6 17 5 1 from to real For stimulated emission these coordinate parameters describe a volume of the simu lation space over which the model is applied The test cells within this volume which can cause emission are solid material cells Any actual particle creation can only take place on exposed surfaces of those cells 6 17 5 2 stimulating species integer optional Integer identifying the stimulating species that is the particle species which through deposition on an emission surface causes the stimulation of the emitted species If used the compiler directive STIMULUS DEPOSITION must be defined see Section 4 4 55 STIMULUS_ DEPOSITION page 22 When this parameter is not used all species present can con
67. direction Y x temporal function O Example of 1 D array input with axial symmetry External Fields external1 type ANALYTIC field BZ spatial function 1 reference point 0 0 0 0 0 0 alignment axis Z symmetry direction THETA x order 6 x temporal function O Example of data file input External Fields external1 type DATAFILE FILETYPE FILENAME format binary x reference point 0 0 0 0 50 0 x alignment axis Z temporal function O 6 15 1 type string Specifies the type of external fields input It can take the values COMPONENT for a single value ANALYTIC for a I D array of field values or DATAFILE for a 2 D or 3 D array of values supplied in an external file For the ANALYTIC option the 1 D array is a tabulated function see Section 6 24 Func tions Input page 144 specified by the spatial function parameter The first column of the table gives the spatial coordinate and the second gives the magnetic field For the DATAFILE option which indicates 2 or 3 dimensional data con tained on a user supplied file FILETYPE specifies one of the available file types 102 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes BFIELD ATHETA MAG3D MAFCO and FILENAME is the name of the file supplied by the user An explanation of the various file types is explained in the section on File Formats See Chapter 7 File Formats page 157 For the ANALYTIC and DATAFILE options either one or both of the
68. directive is needed to generate these quantities see Section 4 4 61 USE CONDUCTIVITY page 23 If no values are available nothing is written to the dump file Default OFF 6 2 10 5 dump current density flag flag If dump current density flag is ON output particle current densities to the vector fields dump file Default OFF 6 2 10 6 dump energy deposition flag flag If dump energy deposition flag is ON output tenuous medium energy loss to the scalar dump file If none are available no values are written Default OFF 6 2 10 7 dump interval integer Dump intervals for field particle extraction and diagnostic data The intervals for each of these can be specified independently using the field dump interval particle dump interval extraction dump interval and diagnostic dump interval keywords respectively These specific intervals default to the value of dump interval Each of these keywords has the same alternate forms as those for dump interval shown below Options for this parameter are dump interval Number of timesteps between output dumps for fields particles etc dump interval time Interval in user units between output dumps for fields particles etc dump interval ns Interval in ns between output dumps for fields particles etc dump interval cm Interval in units of 1 cm c where c is the velocity of light between output dumps for fields particles etc Default 1 e 9 no dum
69. eee coo 148 6 25 2 Integrated Probes ooooooooooooo 148 6 25 3 Particle Measurement Probes 150 6 20 4 Particle Slice Probes omnia Reset 153 0 25 5 Global Particle Probes cai at 153 6 25 6 Global Energy Probes 020005 154 6 25 7 Global Medium Probes s esses sss 154 xi xii LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes 6 25 8 Convergence Probes o o ooooooooooo 154 6 25 9 Performance Probes o ooooooooooo 155 6 25 10 Circuit Model Probes o o 155 T File Formats 772430884 40006 624805050 u mokk 157 71 Method 2 Scattering File 0 0 0 0 c eee eee eee 157 7 2 Method 3 Backscattering File ooo o oooooo 157 7 3 Method 4 Cross Section File o oo ooo o o 159 7 4 BFIELD Magnetic Field File ooooo o ooooo 159 75 ATHETA Magnetic Field File oooo cocococ oooo 160 7 6 MAG3D Magnetic Field File ooooooooo o o 160 7 7 MAFCO Magnetic Field File ooooo o oooooo 161 7 8 Fileread Particle File oo oooooooooomooo o 161 7 9 Particle Interaction Data File o o ooo 161 710 Primary Output Data File o o o ooooooo ooo 162 7 11 Photon Output Data File o o o 162 712 Hysteresis Data File ooooooooooooomooo 163 8 tlie v e Il AA 165 8 1 Perleval Preprocessor
70. file 1sp txi lsp html Creates HTML files from the Texinfo file 1sp txi lsp dvi Runs TeX on 1sp txi to produce a DVI file lsp dvi lsp ps Runs DVIPS on 1sp dvi to produce a PostScript file 1sp ps lsppdf ps Runs DVIPS on 1sp dvi to produce a PostScript file lsppdf ps suitable for conversion to Adobe PDF format The target alldocs creates all of the documentation formats listed above 4 2 Compiling on MS Windows LSP can be compiled with the Microsoft Visual C VC compiler Version 4 or later The first time an executable is created the following steps are required 1 Create a Win32 Console Application project and import the LSP sources 2 Add the XDR library xdr 1ib to the project files 14 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes 3 Add a path to an include directory containing the subdirectory rpc where the files xdr h and types h reside e g Project Settings C C Preprocessor Additional include directories 4 Ensure that the preprocessor definition WIN32 is defined e g Project Settings C C Preprocessor Preprocessor definitions The compiler directives see Sec tion 4 4 Compiler Directives page 15 may also be set here or one can use the lspmake script 5 Add wsock32 1ib to the default libraries to link against e g Project Settings Link bject library modules The files are ready to be compiled
71. flag definition 42 dump ohmic quantities flag definition 42 dump plasma quantities flag definition 42 dump potential flag definition 42 dump rbtheta current flag definition 42 dump restart flag definition 31 R E Clark and T P Hughes dump rho background flag definition 43 dump steps definition 43 dump steps sample input 43 dump substrates flag definition 43 dump surface depositions flag definition 43 dump times definition 0 44 dump times sample input 44 dump timing flag definition 50 dump velocities flag definition 44 PUDE 8n GA cava ee DBA beet OA oO ee eS 150 dynamic field solution Volume Models Input 92 DYNAMIC_FIELDS compiler directives 17 DYNAMIC_FIELDS field_initializatino_flag KANG Ce a NGA eae vee 35 Entornos 148 150 ED model toc ans rea 77 EDENS 3 22 33 yates sii Soke ett wer ee Re a eae sas 148 EDEP eii e xu 148 150 efficiehey ev sendin nals erp Y MES DLE 1 electric fields external External Fields Input la ed 100 electric fields external EXTERNAL EFIELDS 18 electric fields external field 102 electric_force_filtering_parameter definition TI CPP 35 electric spatial filtering parameter 21 electric spatial filt
72. impedance 10 0 1 0 3 4 transit time 36 impedance 1 89 5 transit time 1 impedance 0 1 end junctions VOLTAGE APPLICATION 1 voltage 200 RESISTIVE LOAD 2 resistance 1 e9 SERIES RESISTOR 1 5 resistance 0 2 SIMPLE JUNCTION 2 3 PARALLEL TEE 5 3 4 GRID CONNECTION 4 end The parameters associated with a circuit model are described below 6 10 1 segments Specifies the parameters for each section of the transmission line model using the format segments length L1 impedance Z1 dielectric constant EPS1 length L2 impedance Z2 dielectric constant EPS2 end where L1 is the physical length of the segment Z1 is the impedance of the segment in user units see Chapter 5 User Units page 25 and EPS1 is the relative dielectric constant of the segment The first segment is the one farthest from the simulation boundary The last segment must have the same impedance as the outlet boundary to which it is attached The outward going wave reaching the first segment sees a matched termination unless the termination parameter specifies some other condition e g SHORT in which case it sees a short circuit termination The dielectric constant parameter is optional and has a default value of 1 6 10 2 elements Specifies the parameters for each element of the network model using the format elements 1 transit time T1 impedance Z1 2 transit time T2 impedance Z2 3 capacitance C1 4 inductance L1 88 LSP User s Manual
73. index See Section 6 5 Objects Input page 56 This enables the user to isolate anode current and cathode current selectively If no potential index is specified then the mea surement is made over all conductors within the specified range It should be noted that this integral is performed as close as possible to conductor surfaces in order to exclude free particle currents from the measurement Output is in units of current see Chapter 5 User Units page 25 Integral of a component of E or B times sine or cosine of the spatial coordinate adjusted by mode number along the path specified by the from to param eters The field component need not be the same as the path direction This diagnostic may be useful for measuring the growth of expected modes Example probed fourier E X parity SINE wave lengths O 1 5 from 0 0 0 0 0 150 flux J W LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes to 5 0 0 0 1 0 Integral of current density or Poynting flux through a plane The measurement is always in the positive direction normal to the plane defined by the from to parameters Output is in units of current or energy rate see Chapter 5 User Units page 25 Example probe6 flux J from 0 5 0 5 1 0 to 0 5 0 5 1 0 volume E B RHO RHON WDEP EDEP DWDT DEDT Volume integral to obtain the electric field energy magnetic field energy charge number accumulated surface energy deposition volume
74. interaction 1 species 1 3 charge_state_model AMBIENT atomic_number 13 atomic_weight 27 solid_density 2 7 gm cc ionization energy 6 0 eV melt temperature 990 degrees K log lambda min 3 8 gO 1 0 gi 1 0 pi 1 0 Chapter 6 Input Variables 139 p2a 0 65 p2b 2 0 p3a 0 33 p3b 0 0 p4a 1 35 p5 0 0 interaction 2 All of the optional parameters have associated default values The available options for charge state model are AMBIENT which is the default and THOMAS FERMI 140 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes 6 22 Particle Diagnostics Input This section of input enables the production of diagnostic dumps containing various particle measurements as functions of a spatial coordinate or some other parameter The spatial measurements are typically useful in electron or particle beam simulations where knowledge of certain distributions along the axis of the beam is necessary They are per formed on all particles of a given species present at each grid coordinate of the independent variable in some cases out to a certain radius Therefore the spatial resolution of these diagnostics coincides with that of the simulation grid Other measurements are distribution functions of particle momenta or energies Because they are different from spatial diag nostics they require additional input parameters as shown in the examples below Note that the number_of_bins is needed here as well
75. interval ns 10 0 number of processes 8 balance interval ns 1 0 load balance flag ON region balance flag OFF report timing flag ON rename restart flag ON 6 2 1 Temporal Parameters 6 2 1 1 courant multiplier real Any positive value of courant multiplier will cause the code to determine the simu lation timestep by searching the grid for the smallest Courant limited timestep assuming cartesian coordinates and multiplying it by the value of the courant multiplier In cylin drical coordinates see Section 4 4 13 CYLINDRICAL page 16 a value of about 0 9 or less is required for stability In cartesian coordinates a value of 1 can be used The input value for the time step parameter see Section 6 2 1 4 time step page 31 will take precedence if it is smaller than the internally calculated value 6 2 1 2 number of steps integer Number of timesteps for a simulation run This parameter takes precedence over time limit if it is reached first If it is used in a restart operation the simulation will execute that number of timesteps more from the previous run unless the time limit parameter is reached first In other words on restarts it is not the cumulative timestep count for the simulation but simply the number of timesteps executed for that run Chapter 6 Input Variables 31 6 2 1 3 time_limit real Options for this parameter are time_limit Total physical time in user units to run the simulation that is the time
76. models They provide the various physical properties necessary for the functioning of the energy loss and scattering phenomena associated with those models Note that these materials are generally metals and that specification of materials is only required for those not already contained on internal tables Gas materials used for the conductivity model can not be entered here and are limited to those available in the internal table see Section 6 9 10 gas material page 75 The materials already available are Any other materials can be entered in this section An example of the format is as follows carbon aluminum iron copper molybdenum silver tantalum tungsten rhenium gold Materials material lead atomic_number 82 atomic_weight 207 19 ionization potential 810 eV specific heat 0 13 J gK material zinc atomic number 30 atomic weight 65 39 ionization potential 320 eV specific heat 0 38 J gK The parameters associated with a material are self explanatory Chapter 6 Input Variables 73 6 9 Medium Models Input The Medium Models section is used to specify physical properties associated with ob jects in order to apply energy loss and scattering models to particles and to specify elec tromagnetic properties dielectric constant conductivity etc see Section 6 5 Objects Input page 56 Individual entries are numbered consecutively by appending an integer index to the medium keyword Objects with medium index
77. of photoionization is calculated every interval timesteps The production_factor multiplies the charge of the simulation particles produced in a photoionization event To maintain the correct physical charge the photoionization probability is multiplied by the inverse of this factor A value of 1 gives simulation particle production at the physical rate relative to the number of species particles Values less than 1 generate more simulation particles which may be desirable for better statistics The code cannot produce more than one ionized particle per event so there is a lower bound on the value of production_factor below which the number of simulation particles does not increase 6 17 12 5 reference_point real Location of the center of the spherical photon source This parameter is for the EXTERNAL SOURCE model only 6 17 12 6 source radius real Radius of the spherical photon source This parameter is for the EXTERNAL SOURCE model only 6 17 12 7 ionization potential real Ionization potential of the species atom in eV This is used as a cutoff energy and as a threshold for the thermal energy of the resulting ions This parameter is for the EXTERNAL SOURCE model only 6 17 12 8 temporal function integer Time dependence of the blackbody radiator temperature in eV Time of flight effects are calculated as part of the model This parameter is for the EXTERNAL SOURCE model only 6 17 12 9 cross section file string A
78. particle data file string 131 6 17 16 3 temporal function integer 131 6 17 16 4 recycle time real 131 GATA CBSSIOBE oin cadebat io Neb cin 131 6 17 17 1 from to real oco ka REY 132 6 17 17 2 maximum number integer 132 0 T7 18 trajectory aces eh Rete ede rtp REPAS 132 6 17 18 1 charge weight integer 133 6 17 18 2 episodes 0 cece ee eee ee 133 6 17 18 3 select IBleger is den ee ye ER 133 Particle Collapse Input 0 0 00 e eee eee ee eee 134 6 18 1 interval integer cocida e NEA 134 6 18 2 threshold integer ooooooooooooo 134 6 18 3 maximum number integer 134 6 18 4 tolerance real eiie e toad daw tae ta EUER 134 6 18 5 lower Gutol real iso di pan 134 6 18 6 upper cutoff reali ieri eei esent 134 Particle Migration Input 0 000000 ee ee eee 135 6 19 1 hybrid_kinetic_species integer 135 6 19 2 hybrid fluid species integer 135 6 19 3 hybrid kinetic species movie tag integer 135 6 19 4 hybrid fluid species movie tag integer 136 6 19 5 transition ratio real a 136 Particle Extraction Input 137 Particle Interaction Input 138 Particle Diagnostics Input ooooooooocoooooo 140 Particle Targets Input 142 Buncti ns INPU 12 tI AA PAMANA idas 144 Probes Input 24 2 6 eR ee ea EE RE RR 148 6 25 1 Point Probes 0 0 cece
79. particle species those for ionization events see Section 6 17 10 ionization page 122 those for charge exchange events and those for random montecarlo scattering see Sec tion 6 21 Particle Interaction Input page 138 For ionization the file format is as follows Table of interactions for p on neutral H2 Type Num energy Charge Mass twice 1 200 1 1 836000e 03 0 3 672000e 03 Energy dEdx Sigma ion Nu mom 4 690980e 02 4 004441e 14 0 000000e 00 9 094049e 20 5 045765e 02 4 575827e 14 0 000000e 00 9 962914e 20 for 200 energy values Header lines beginning with are ignored The first integer 1 identifies this as an ioniza tion table The second integer 200 gives the number of energy values in the table The next two lines give the charge state and mass of the interacting species normalized to the values for a positron These values must match exactly those specified in the Particle Species section see Section 6 16 Particle Species Input page 104 Following this is one or more comment lines beginning with and finally the table of values with the follow ing columns energy eV energy loss rate eV cm 3 cm ionization cross section cm 2 momentum transfer frequency cm 3 cm For particle energies lower higher than the minimum maximum energy in the table the values for the minimum maximum energy are used If the values are independent of energy a single entry in the table is sufficient
80. see Section 4 4 48 SCATTERING ON page 21 Default OFF 6 16 11 implicit filtering parameter real optional Damping factor for the c0 d1 particle push Ref 3 The default value is 1 giving maximum damping d1 scheme A value of 0 gives the undamped reversible c0 scheme This parameter applies to implicit species only Default 1 maximum damping d1 scheme 6 16 12 selection ratio integer optional Causes a random selection of particles of this species during output of the particle dumps such that the number selected is a fraction of the total according to this ratio Default 1 0 108 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes 6 17 Particle Creation Input Particles can be introduced into the simulation in several ways The following table lists the keywords used to invoke the available models emission emission from a surface using either the child langmuir field limited source limited or stimulated models discussed below injection injection through a boundary e g a beam secondary secondary emission of electrons and positrons from a surface as a result of either a method 2 medium or a method 4 medium see Section 6 9 Medium Models Input page 73 backscatter backscatter is applied to particles primary or secondary which have impinged upon a method 3 medium see Section 6 9 Medium Models Input page 73 desorption thermal and or stimulated desorption of neutra
81. shape is well defined The material properties will be defined in cells where the function has a positive value Although the function is assumed to use the coordinate values of the simulation coordinate grid as the independent variables there is an option to cause the function to utilize transformed cartesian coordinates as the input variables The optional keyword is coordinates followed by either cartesian or default in the position shown in the example See Section 6 24 Functions Input page 144 Example object8 FUNCTION 4 coordinates default conductor on medium 2 6 5 6 PARABOLOID Defines a paraboloid with the tip at the origin coordinates and with the specified height and radius values at the large end The orientation is given by the polar_angle and azimuthal_angle parameters whose format is polar_angle azimuthal_angle AXIS ANGLE where AXIS can be X Y Z and the ANGLE is in degrees This orientation is performed in cartesian coordinates even if the simulation coordinates are non cartesian The two axes must not be the same The resulting orientation vector points from the origin to the large end Coordinate system independent shape Example object9 PARABOLOID conductor on medium O potential 0 origin 5 0 0 0 0 0 polar angle Z 0 0 azimuthal angle X 0 0 height 8 0 radius 3 0 60 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes 6 5 7 PARALLELEPIPED Defines a par
82. the so called Debye length numerical instability that heats plasma electrons until their Debye length reaches the grid cell size An energy conserving PIC algorithm is also available that is not affected by the Debye length instability A cloud in cell CIC particle description is available that significantly reduces the noise level of the simulation see Section 4 4 21 EXTENDED_PARTICLES page 17 A direct implicit particle field push can be used in either the PIC or CIC models Algorithms are implemented for field emission auxiliary circuit models dielectrics dis persive magnetic materials RF absorption secondary electron generation in materials multiple scattering and energy loss surface heating and energy deposition desorption of neutrals from surfaces ionization of neutrals and interparticle collisions A hybrid fluid model has been implemented to work in concert with the collision algorithms For all of the above particle push options a hybrid kinetic fluid model can be invoked for any charged particle species The PIC or CIC method is used with either the usual kinetic equations or a set of fluid equations in which the particle in addition to the usual attributes retains an internal energy A transition criteria is implemented that allows electron species to transition back and forth from the two descriptions while conserving momentum exactly LSP particle and field data files are written in XDR format allowing binary data to be
83. the thermal distribution This parameter is usually only important for intense laser plasmas The FLUID PHYSICS compiler directive must be invoked for this to have any effect see Section 4 4 25 FLUID PHYSICS page 18 Default 0 2 6 2 8 4 kinetic migration interval integer Number of timesteps between migrations of particles from fluid to kinetic when the fluid physics model is being used see Section 4 4 25 FLUID PHYSICS page 18 See Section 6 19 Particle Migration Input page 135 Default 0 6 2 8 5 pdv term flag flag If pdv term flag is OFF execute the fluid physics model without the PdV heating term Use only when the FLUID_PHYSICS compiler directive is on see Section 4 4 25 FLUID_ PHYSICS page 18 Default ON 6 2 8 6 vcrossb flag flag If vcrossb flag is ON include the V cross B term in the application of the air chemistry conductivity model Default ON 40 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes 6 2 8 7 surface viscosity flag flag If surface viscosity flag is ON the fluid pressure gradients tangential to solid mate rial surfaces are set to zero full viscosity The pressure gradients normal to surfaces are always zero Default ON 6 2 9 Moving Frame Algorithm 6 2 9 1 moving frame velocity real If moving frame velocity is non zero the moving frame of reference model is put into effect The velocity is in user units In order to use this feature which m
84. to the presence of species densities as expained below 6 17 11 3 cross sections real Specifies stripping cross sections for each species present which contributes to a total probability for a stripping event on the species being stripped of an electron to the next higher ionization state When zero values are specified the effect of that species is not included This is in addition to or instead of the stripping due to the field ionization as expained above Also note that this list may include an energy dependent function instead of a value for any of the species 6 17 12 photoionization Two models for the photoionization of neutral and ionic species are available For the first which is designated EXTERNAL SOURCE the radiation source is assumed to be a cylin drical blackbody radiator Ref 10 The radiation field is assumed to be larger than the source radius or length 7 1 cm The blackbody temperature may be time dependent Chapter 6 Input Variables 125 The user may specify the source radius and centroid position but the source length is fixed at 1 cm A cross section table must be provided for the designated species involved The second model designated AMBIENT FIELD uses the energy contained in the electric field on a cell by cell basis to determine the probability of an ionization event Any electrons that are produced by these reactions will appear in the designated electron species Ions will belong to the spe
85. two axes must not be the same Optionally a cylindrical section can be constructed by the presence of two parameters start angle and sweep angle which indicate a possibly limited extent in the cylinder This angle is assumed to be zero in the direction of the azimuthal AXIS after rotation Coordinate system independent shape Example object4 CYLINDER beam pipe conductor off medium O potential 0 base 0 0 0 0 1 0 polar angle Z 0 0 azimuthal angle X 0 0 height 10 0 radius 0 49 start angle 0 sweep angle 360 6 5 4 FOIL Defines a thin foil One of the from coordinates must be the same as the to coordinate i e the values define a planar surface This shape must be a conductor It cannot be associated with a medium model In order to use a medium model for particle scattering Chapter 6 Input Variables 59 purposes the BLOCK shape should be used with a thickness of at least one cell Coordinate system dependent shape Example object62 FOIL thin foil anode conductor on potential 0 from 23 0 0 0952 56 67 to 23 0 0 2856 69 67 6 5 5 FUNCTION Allows the user complete generality in defining structural shapes The index of the func tion defined in the Functions section of input to be used directly follows the FUNCTION keyword The only requirement is that the function must have at least the same number of independent variables as there are real dimensions in the simulation grid so that the result ing
86. used elsewhere in the input file to refer to that species If ionization see Section 6 17 10 ionization page 122 or photoionization see Section 6 17 12 photoionization page 124 is being used then each ionization state is treated as a separate species and successively higher ionization states must be listed in sequence i e if species3 is neutral then the first ionization state should be species4 etc The parameters for the species are described below Example Particle Species species1 charge 1 mass 1 0 fluid species flag off migrant species flag off implicit species flag off particle motion flag on particle forces option averaged transverse weighting flag on particle kinematics option standard montecarlo scattering flag off selection ratio 0 5 Species2 charge 1 mass 1836 0 atomic number 1 selection ratio 1 0 Example when using the ionization model see Section 6 17 10 ionization page 122 Particle Species species1 charge 1 mass 1 0 fluid species flag off x particle forces option primary x species2 charge 1 mass 1836 0 atomic number 1 x species3 charge O mass 3674 0 atomic number 2 x species4 charge 1 mass 3673 0 Chapter 6 Input Variables 105 atomic_number 2 Example when using the higherstate model see Section 6 17 11 higherstate page 123 Particle Species species1 charge 1 mass 1 0 fluid species flag off particle forces op
87. y cells NY zmin ZMIN zmax ZMAX z cells NZ where XMIN XMAX YMIN YMAX ZMIN ZMAX are the coordinate limits of the grid and NX NY NZ are the number of cells in each direction In cylindrical and spherical coordinates x can be replaced by r and y can be replaced by th denoting theta In spherical coordinates z can be replaced by phi Spatial dimensions are in units of length except for rotational coordinates the y or th coordinates in cylindrical or spherical geometries and the z or phi coordinates in spherical geometry which are in radians The units of length are dependent upon which system of units has been specified by the user see Chapter 5 User Units page 25 For 1 D and 2 D simulations those coordinates not used in the simulation called virtual coordinates are ignored and are not required in the definition of the grid There is the option called non uniform gridding which allows the cell size to vary in a piecewise linear manner along any of the three coordinates For example a series of intervals are specified by stating the xmin and xmax and the number of cells in each interval The code uses this information to complete the grid An example of the format for the x coordinate is xmin XMIN xmax XMAX x cells NX Chapter 6 Input Variables 53 dx start DX x intervals length L1 for NI length L2 for N2 end where DX is th
88. 010 397 method det ri o iba eU C e 82 6 9 33 1 backscatter data file string 83 6 0 94 method 4ra eerie a I YS 83 6 9 34 1 gen data file string orici een 84 6 9 34 2 photon cutoff energy real 84 6 10 Circuit Models Input 85 Os TOLL Segmentiss lire eee EE Re eee LBG 87 Gal elements sot cubic din du iru o es Pn tcd pt ches 87 6 10 13 JUNCTIONS cies eae nem eed Rma 88 6 10 4 termination string optional 89 6 10 5 capacitance real optional 90 6 10 6 inductance real optional Less 90 6 10 7 resistance real optional 90 6 10 8 resistance function integer optional 90 6 10 9 voltage real optional oo ooo ooo 90 6 10 10 voltage function integer optional 90 6 10 11 startup time real optional 91 6 10 12 frequency real optional 91 vil viii LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes 6 10 13 impedance product function integer optional cis Ee DL eum rS aoi ed NG 91 6 11 Volume Models Input aaa 92 6 11 1 conductivity 00 ee eee eee eee 93 611 2 dielectriG nni tees sass BA Te ee 93 GALLS dipoles cis anata tah ey dele it brave ed eels be 94 GIA fernte a ue e Hickey btu dt Ee ode gun 94 6 11 5 hysteresis Li odds br ar 95 6 11 6 paramagnetic aa 96 6 12 Liner Models Inpu
89. 123 or may be used simply for diagnostic purposes Whenever this directive is used the compiler directive MAX_SPECIES must also be defined see Section 4 4 40 MAX_SPECIES page 20 4 4 45 PARTICLE_COLLAPSE Allows use of the particle collapse algorithm which vastly reduces the number of particles present by combining pairs of particles in the same cell and with similar velocities see Section 6 18 Particle Collapse Input page 134 4 4 46 PRIMARY_SPECIES Sets the species number to be used as the primary species for the simulation For example the method 2 scattering medium model see Section 6 9 32 method 2 page 81 is applied only to the primary species and no other Default 1 4 4 47 QUASINEUTRAL_FIELDS Solve the EM fields by the quasi neutral Darwin approximation that is with displace ment current neglected This involves modification of the usual Maxwell equations in which Ohm s Law is used instead of Ampere s Law while still retaining Faraday s Law 4 4 48 SCATTERING_ON Enables the scattering model which is a subset of the collisional plasma model see Section 4 4 7 COLLISIONAL_PLASMA page 16 Whenever this directive is used the compiler directive MAX_SPECIES must also be defined see Section 4 4 40 MAX_SPECIES page 20 4 4 49 SPATIAL_FILTER Invoke the use of diffusive terms to damp light waves spatially in the explicit electro magnetic field equations See Section 6 2 4 9 electric_spatial_fil
90. 2 coefficients CO x exp C1 x plus minus exponential 4 coefficients CO exp C1 x C2 exp C3 x one over exponential 5 coefficients CO exp x C1 C2 C3 C4 sine raised to power N plus constant 5 coefficients CO sin C1 x C3 0 5e9 x C2 N C4 CO magnitude C1 angular frequency C2 offset in radians C3 sweep rate in Hz time unit zero for no sweep C4 added constant sine rise to constant 2 coefficients for x lt C1 CO sin xx Pi 2 C1 for x gt C1 CO exponential decay from infinity 3 coefficients for x lt C2 0 0 for x gt C2 C0 1 0 exp C1 x C2 Bessel function JO 3 coefficients CO JO C1 x C2 Bessel function J1 3 coefficients CO J1 C1 x C2 one minus exponential rise and fall raised to power N 3 coefficients for x lt C2 CO 1 0 exp C1 x 1 0 exp C1 C2 x N for x gt C2 0 0 parabolic rise and fall 2 coefficients CO 1 0 x C1 2 C1 C1 for x gt 2 C1 0 0 sine a sine b flat spectrum 4 coefficients fo x lt C3 CO sin C2 x C3 2 sin C1 x C3 2 C2 C1 x C3 2 for x gt C3 0 0 Bennett profile 3 coefficients for x lt C2 C0 1 0 x C1 2 2 for x gt C2 0 0 Gaussian profile 3 coefficients for x lt C2 CO exp x C1 2 for x gt C2 0 0 smooth ramp between two constants 4 coefficients CO magnitude before ramp Chapter 6 Input Variables 147 C1 magnitude after ramp
91. 20 EXACT_IMPLICIT page 17 This directive should be used with caution it provides a first order correction only and is not accurate when fields are changing too rapidly for example In such cases it would be advisable to use the iterative ADI solution instead 4 4 30 IMPLICIT_FIELDS Uses the ADI field solver With this option only fields are treated implicitly Particles are not In order to treat particles implicitly the DIRECT_IMPLICIT option must be defined see Section 4 4 16 DIRECT_IMPLICIT page 16 4 4 31 INTER_DOMAIN_TRACKING Enables particles to travel more than one cell in a timestep even across domain bound aries This can be used in place of the EXTRA MOTION compiler directive see Section 4 4 24 EXTRA_MOTION page 18 The difference between them is that EXTRA MOTION used alone will hold back particles which during a timestep move more than a single cell after cross ing a domain boundary whereas using INTER_DOMAIN_TRACKING will result in unaltered trajectories at a slight expense in running efficiency 4 4 32 IONIZATION ON Enables the ionization model which is a subset of the collisional plasma model see Section 4 4 7 COLLISIONAL PLASMA page 16 Whenever this directive is used the compiler directive MUTABLE SPECIES must also be defined see Section 4 4 42 MUTABLE SPECIES page 20 4 4 33 KELVIN DEPOSITION Turns on thermal surface heating in material structures provided that one of the ap pr
92. 20 0 amps sq cm movie tag O movie fraction 0 0 6 17 5 emission stimulated Stimulated emission is defined as the creation of initially stationary charge at a sur face in a specified ratio to the amount of charge hitting the surface Either the CHARGE DEPOSITION or the STIMULUS DEPOSITION compiler directive must be defined in order to use this model see Section 4 4 6 CHARGE DEPOSITION page 15 or see Section 4 4 55 STIMULUS DEPOSITION page 22 The use of the STIMULUS DEPOSITION compiler directive is linked with the stimulating species parameter described below A surface temperature threshold can be specified below which no emission occurs In order to use the temperature threshold the KELVIN_DEPOSITION compiler directive must be defined see Section 4 4 33 KELVIN DEPOSITION page 19 The surface temperature is computed from the energy deposited by electrons or positrons and the specific heat of the surface material Note A solid medium model is required in order to generate the necessary surface temperature data see Section 6 9 Medium Models Input page 73 Caution if a stimulated emission surface is only one cell thick it will behave such that the physical parameters of those cells will act on both sides of the surface In order to make the two sides react to physical conditions independently the material should be at least two cells thick The model specific parameters are described below Generic parameters are
93. 251 alpha value 5 0 dB dt values in Gauss ns 0 8 0 18 0 27 0 45 0 62 0 single B and multiple H values in units of Gauss and Oersted 1 6232E 04 2 7323E 01 2 T7323E 01 for 251 B field values Note that there are six values of H field for each value of B field making six distinctive B H curves one for each value of dB dt The total collection of data should cover the complete range of possible values relevant to the desired hysteresis behavior During the simulation values of H field as a function of B and dB dt are determined by interpolation from these curves The alpha parameter is the slope of H versus B at the origin which is needed to correctly determine the shape of minor loop curves since the data are for the major loop only 164 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes Chapter 8 Utilities 165 8 Utilities 8 1 Perleval Preprocessor Perleval is a Perl script which allows one to define and use symbolic names in the LSP input file Variable names must begin with a character and expressions including single variables are enclosed in curly brackets Variables may be defined in a comment section at the top of the input file and then expressions using these variables may appear anywhere within the input file Essentially the same capability is built into the GLSP preprocessor see Section 1 2 GLSP Preprocessor page 2 which uses the Tcl expression evaluator
94. 4 threshold desorption definition 121 threshold desorption sample input 121 threshold emission definition 113 threshold emission KELVIN DEPOSITION 19 threshold emission field limited 113 time biased field solver lusus 36 time bias coefficient definition 36 time bias coefficient sample input 36 time bias coefficient time bias iterations A 36 time_bias_iterations definition 36 time bias iterations sample input 36 time delay definition 68 R E Clark and T P Hughes time limit definition 00 0 31 time limit dump restart flag 31 time limit number of steps 30 time limit Single Processor Machines 7 time step definition 4 31 time step courant multiplier 30 title sample input 0000 29 Title pute erimus 29 TM wave sample input o ocoooc ooooo 64 tolerance definition 134 TORUS definition 0 0 eee eee 61 TORUS sample input esses 61 trajectory definition 0 132 trajectory sample input 132 transition ratio definition 136 transparency definition 74 transverse_weighting_flag definition 107 TRILATERAL definition
95. 44 6 2 10 19 dump velocities flag flag 44 6 2 10 20 extract photons flag flag 44 6 2 10 21 extract primaries flag flag 44 6 2 10 22 extract secondaries flag flag 45 6 2 10 23 field movie components strings 45 6 2 10 24 field movie coordinate string amp real Pan Ma sow he ee loa Meets E 45 6 2 10 25 field movie interval integer 45 6 2 10 26 particle movie components strings 45 6 2 10 27 particle movie interval integer 46 6 2 10 28 photon output format string 46 6 2 10 29 primary output format string 46 6 2 10 30 probe interval integer 46 6 2 10 31 scalar movie components strings 46 6 2 10 32 scalar movie coordinate string amp real bas PH en tr P SL EAS NAS 47 6 2 10 33 scalar movie interval integer AT 6 2 10 34 spatialskip x integer 48 6 2 10 35 spatial skip y integer 48 6 2 10 36 spatial skip z integer 48 6 2 10 37 structure output format string 48 6 2 10 38 target movie interval integer 49 6 2 10 39 target output format string 49 6 2 11 Numerical Checks and Reports 49 6 2 11 1 domain boundary check flag 49 6 2 11 2 particle cyclotron check flag 50 6 2 11 3 particle motion check flag 50 6 2 11 4 print control flag flag 50 6 2 11 5 print conv
96. 44 F ferrite definiti0OL o oooooooooooo 94 ferrite MAGNETIC_DISPERSION 20 ferrite MAX_RESONANCES 20 field definitioN oooooooooooo 102 Field Solution and Modification 33 Held S0lvers ic a AS EPA UR 17 field_advance_flag definition 35 field dump interval definition A1 field dump steps definition 43 field dump times definition 44 field initialization flag 17 field initialization flag definition 35 field movie components definition 45 field movie components sample input 45 field movie coordinate definition 45 field movie coordinate sample input 45 field movie interval definition 45 File Formats 22 udi uu 157 File Formats field 0005 102 fileread definition 005 130 fileread sample input 131 Fileread Particle File 161 Fileread Particle File particle_data_file 131 fileread Fileread Particle File 161 fileread Particle Slice Probes 153 fileread slice_times 111 first product species definition 130 fission definition 0 000 131 fission sample input 132 flag parameter type 5 fluid electrons fluid_species_flag
97. 57 primary data file cupri tab 6 9 32 5 electron data file string The file containing the energy and angle lookup data for the secondary electrons see Section 7 1 Method 2 Scattering File page 157 electron data file cusec tab 6 9 32 6 positron data file string The file containing the energy and angle lookup data for the secondary positrons see Section 7 1 Method 2 Scattering File page 157 positron data file cupos tab 6 9 33 method 3 Applies backscattering to primary and secondary electrons which have impinged upon a solid material The user supplied scattering tables and probabilities can be computed from the Integrated Tiger Series codes Ref 5 The table format is given in Section 7 2 Method 3 Backscattering File page 157 The primary electron species is species1 or the species designated by the PRIMARY SPECIES compiler directive see Section 4 4 46 PRIMARY SPECIES page 21 The backscattered electrons belong to the species designated by the species parameter of the backscatter model see Section 6 17 8 backscatter page 119 The parameters associated with this model are described below Example of a medium using 4 D backscattering lookup tables Chapter 6 Input Variables 83 Medium Models medium1 method 3 dielectric_constant 1 0 density 16 6 g cc for Ta temperature 300 0 polar_angle Z 270 azimuthal_angle X 0 collision_energies 40 minimum energy 1 0e6 eV maximum energy 2 0
98. 6 FLUID_SPECIES Sets the number of fluid species allowed in a simulation Used in conjunction with the FLUID PHYSICS compiler directive see Section 4 4 25 FLUID PHYSICS page 18 Default 1 4 4 27 FREESPACE PML Enables the modeling of freespace with one of the perfectly matched layer PML tech niques The two available models are the so called uniaxial PML also known as the unsplit version and the convolutional PML also known as the complex frequency shifted PML CFSPML in its most generalized form The user must invoke this directive in order to use the PML options under the freespace boundary model see Section 6 6 4 Freespace Boundaries page 69 4 4 28 FRICTIONAL EFFECTS Enables frictional drag effects between species in a collisional plasma This is used in conjuction with either the COLLISIONAL PLASMA or the SCATTERING ON compiler directives However frictional effects can only be used when the direct implicit algorithm has been invoked see Section 4 4 16 DIRECT IMPLICIT page 16 Chapter 4 Compiling LSP 19 4 4 29 FULL_SUSCEPTIBILITY Uses the full complement of off diagonal terms of susceptibility for calculating correc tion currents Susceptibility is a property of the direct implicit algorithm see Section 4 4 16 DIRECT_IMPLICIT page 16 These additional terms are ordinarily used in the conven tional iterative ADI field solution but not in the unconditionally stable version see Section 4 4
99. 9 scalar movie components definition 46 scalar movie components sample input 47 scalar movie coordinate definition 47 scalar movie coordinate sample input 47 scalar movie interval definition 47 scatter angles definition 81 scattering definition 00 81 scattering method 2 a 81 scattering interval definition 38 scattering_interval COLLISIONAL_PLASMA 16 SCATTERING_ON compiler directives 21 SCATTERING_ON dump_accelerations_flag 40 SCATTERING_ON dump_montecarlo_diagnostics_flag 41 SCATTERING_ON dump_plasma_quantities_flag ET Made cient PAA 42 SCATTERING_ON dump_velocities_flag 44 SCATTERING_ON FLUID_PHYSICS 18 SCATTERING_ON fluid_species_flag 106 SCATTERING_ON FRICTIONAL_EFFECTS 18 SCATTERING ON MAX_SPECIES 20 SCATTERING ON montecarlo scattering flag Lice lb GA AGA aNG kara bo NG e M doc 107 SCATTERING_ON Particle Interaction Input 138 SCATTERING_ON scalar_movie_components 46 SCATTERING ON scattering_interval 38 script 1sp sample file 9 script lsp sample file Intel Teraflop 8 second_product_species definition 130 secondary definition 118 secondary sample input 118 secondary electron probability 82 Cha
100. 98 USE_SUBSTRATE compiler directives 23 USE_XSEC compiler directives 24 User Units ai A EL es 25 User Units conductivity sess 93 User Units density 000 00 74 User Units episodes 133 User Units Grid Input 0 52 Chapter 10 General Index User Units maximum_desorption_rate 121 User Units Particle Extraction Input 137 User Units Potentials Input 71 User Units Regions Input 54 User Units segments 87 User Units startup time sss 91 User Units stimulated cross section 121 User Units surface conductivity 74 user defined functions 23 147 Utilities 2 crianza Aa dada 165 y vcrossb_flag definition 39 vertical bar Conventions 5 voltage definition 90 voltage function definition 90 voltage measurement definition 68 volume model sample input 92 Volume Models Input 04 92 VOLUME WEIGHTING compiler directives 24 Wits KGG cdo LPA a IANPA EPIS 148 water content definition 75 wave launcher 63 WDEP 222 datos aca 148 150 185 Windows files needed Compiling on MS WIDdOWS 4 sss dv Rr be pem a 13 Windows Compiling on MS Windows 13 W
101. AL_FIELDS compiler directives 21 plor PE 9 R radius function definition 117 random definitioL o oooooooooo 110 random_energy_function plasma definition E pier dt Daas Le Tis AA 129 rdump Command File 0 11 real parameter type a 5 recursive convolution method ferrite 94 recycle time definition 131 reference point external field definition 102 reference point medium definition 76 reference_point particle creation definition A aan ate LINGA niit ge 110 reference_point photoionization definition Mee ets uite E la a aa LG utes 126 reference point density function plasma A rts under ma oq d dte tat at s tial Pind gegen 127 181 reference point momentum function plasma mp PER 127 reference point radius function 117 reference point spatial function injection A ex 4 RU NINA WADA NLA aS eee ex 116 reference point spatial momentum function Aa PA kage Un 117 References n 0 0 cece n nents 167 region_balance_flag definition 33 region_balance_flag balance_interval 32 region_balance_flag load_balance_flag 33 region balance flag Regions Input 55 Regions Input a ri otek aad RB NN NG GNG NG 54 regions load balance flag 33 regions LSP Simulation Code 1 regions region balance flag 33 regions R
102. ATHETA Magnetic Field File page 160 In both cases the data are transformed into Bx By Bz when using a cartesian simulation grid For 3 D fields an ASCII file produced by the MAG3D code can be accepted see Sec tion 7 6 MAG3D Magnetic Field File page 160 or a similar binary file produced by MAFCO may be utilized see Section 7 7 MAFCO Magnetic Field File page 161 The latter file type is produced by the mafco code contained internally in the LSP package The parameters associated with external field input are described below Example of single value input External Fields external1 type COMPONENT field B Z 300 0 temporal function O where the qualifier COMPONENT indicates the single value option Example of 1 D array input External Fields external1 type ANALYTIC field BZ spatial function 1 from 0 0 0 0 0 0 x to 8 0 8 0 8 0 reference_point 0 0 0 0 0 0 alignment axis Z symmetry direction NONE temporal function O Functions external field data for the laser diode functionl type O data pairs 6 00E 00 6 7315E 02 4 30E 00 7 1863E 02 Chapter 6 Input Variables 101 2 60E 00 7 6390E 02 9 00E 01 8 0763E 02 8 00E 01 8 4832E 02 2 50E 00 8 8445E 02 4 20E 00 9 1476E 02 5 90E 00 9 3843E 02 end Example of 1 D array input with bilateral symmetry External Fields external1 type ANALYTIC field BZ spatial function 1 reference point 0 0 0 0 0 0 alignment axis Z symmetry
103. Aang M ge EN aden O qM OX mg EUST 44 Primary Output Data File extract primaries flag 44 primary data file definition 82 primary output format definition 46 primary output format sample input 46 primary probability definition 82 PRIMARY SPECIES Lysias due banana 118 PRIMARY SPECIES compiler directives 21 PRIMARY SPECIES method 2 81 PRIMARY SPECIES method 3 82 PRIMARY SPECIES species medium 76 print control flag definition 50 print convergence flag definition 50 print convergence flag implicit iterations dorus du dense sedated cee at tees AA 37 print_covergence_flag potential_iterations A Siete tanh I AeA ted seinen nababa aba ba 38 print grid flag definition 50 print region flag definition 50 probe interval definition 46 probe interval Probes Input 148 Probes Inptt iri ri atra es KAG teas REM 148 production_factor definition 126 production rates definition 123 purely outgoing boundary sample input 63 Python functions 0000 23 147 Q QD EP eda beak Ba GA ND NABANG na ba areas 148 ASUS da ita 9 QSUB_WORKDIR tia eee eee eee 9 QUADRILATERAL definition 60 QUADRILATERAL sample input 60 QUASINEUTR
104. Control Input extract photons flag 77 Control Input extract_primaries_flag 77 Control Input extract_secondaries_flag 77 Control Input ionization 122 Control Input Particle Targets Input 143 Conventions ross Tormos ES eas eq gee ae IM ee 5 conventions coordinates a 5 conventions document 00005 5 conventions fonts 5 conventions index eee eee eee eee 5 convergence definition 118 Convergence Probes definition 154 Convergence Probes implicit iterations 37 Convergence Probes potential iterations 38 convergence iterations definition 34 convergence tolerance definition 34 conversion rate definition 129 convolutional PML model sample input 69 Coordinate system dependent shape BLOCK 57 Coordinate system dependent shape FOIL 59 Coordinate system dependent shape FUNCTION Ple e edita a ted ed ne eec uds 59 Coordinate system dependent shape QUADRILATERAL isu ca ddr met eaen E i 60 Chapter 10 General Index Coordinate system dependent shape TRILATERAL raat asian dee Bop ange bay Ai ud ag ede E o e Rd 60 Coordinate system dependent shape WIRE 62 Coordinate system independent shape CONE 58 Coordinate system independent shape CYLINDER Banana nG apc Hae uan Dien EA a E the d 58 Coordinate system independent shape PARABOLOI
105. D Coordinate system independent shape PARALEELEPIPED bina kag era 60 pc CUM 61 Coordinate system independent shape TORUS 61 coordinates CAR ONE 15 coordinates CAR_X_Y o ooooooooooomoo o 15 coordinates CAR_X_Z 0 cece eee eee eee 15 coordinates CARTESIAN lues eese eee 15 coordinates Conventions esses eese 5 coordinates courant multiplier 30 coordinates CYL_ONE 0 0c eee eeee 16 coordinates CYL R TH aaaaana nnna nanan 16 coordinates CYL R Z cee eee eee eee 16 coordinates CYLINDRICAL 4 16 coordinates Grid Xa gya eh che te nae hee Vbag 52 coordinates LSP Simulation Code 1 coordinates print grid flag 50 coordinates Regions Input 54 coordinates small radius exlusion 36 coordinates SPH_ONE 00 eee essen 21 coordinates SPH_R_TH o ooooooooooo 21 coordinates SPHERICAL 0 o o oooooo 22 coordinates VOLUME_WEIGHTING 24 CODD6E odere Med edt ere ets 72 78 Coulomb collisions Particle Interaction Input Habang Bed pno hg BB GL GD bm bet ad P MEE 138 courant multiplier definition 30 CPU time dump timing flag 50 CPU time Performance Probes 155 CPU time report timing flag 51 cross sections higherstate 124 cross sections ionization
106. ESORPTION_ON be defined see Section 4 4 15 DESORPTION_ON page 16 Stimulated desorption requires a method 1 method 3 or method 4 medium for the surface in order for surface heating to take 120 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes place Charged ion species may optionally be created along with the neutral species as a result of stimulated desorption Caution if a stimulated desorption surface is only one cell thick it will behave such that the physical parameters of those cells will act on both sides of the surface In order to make the two sides react to physical conditions independently the material should be at least two cells thick The model specific parameters are described below Generic parameters are described in Section 6 17 1 Particle Creation Parameters page 109 Example desorption from 0 0 0 to 1 0 1 0 interval 10 species 1 movie_tag 1 ion_species 2 optional input charged ions with same mass as neutrals movie_tag 2 stimulated_ion_fraction 0 1 thermal_ion_fraction 0 0 electron species O movie tag O medium O monolayers 5 0 threshold temperature 400 binding energy 7 0 eV maximum desorption rate 1 5 monolayers ns stimulated cross section 1 e 14 cm 2 sampling rate 1 0 thermal energy 1000 0 eV minimum charge 0 01 movie fraction 0 0 6 17 9 1 from to real For the desorption model these coordinate parameters describe a volu
107. IELDS page 22 otherwise optional for diagnostic purposes Automatically defined if STATIC FIELDS is defined 4 4 6 CHARGE DEPOSITION Turns on charge deposition on material surfaces 16 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes 4 4 7 COLLISIONAL_PLASMA Enable particle interactions which occur in dense plasmas such as ionization see Sec tion 6 17 10 ionization page 122 and scattering phenomena The ionization model is ap plied every ionization interval timesteps see Section 6 2 7 1 ionization_interval page 38 The scattering model is applied every scattering interval timesteps see Sec tion 6 2 7 2 scattering interval page 38 4 4 8 CURRENT CORRECTION Turns on the current correction algorithm for use with either the explicit or the implicit electromagnetic field algorithms 4 4 9 CURRENTS OFF Turns off effect of particle currents on the electromagnetic field solution for debugging 4 4 10 CYL ONE Use 1 D cylindrical radial coordinates 4 4 11 CYL R TH Use 2 D cylindrical r theta coordinates 4 4 12 CYL R Z Use 2 D cylindrical r z coordinates 4 4 13 CYLINDRICAL Use 3 D cylindrical r theta z coordinates 4 4 14 DELAY BREAKDOWN Enable specification of a temporal dependence function for modification of emission current after breakdown 4 4 15 DESORPTION ON Enable use of the neutral desorption model 4 4 16 DIRECT IMPLICIT Use the direct implicit field
108. LSP Simulation Code 2 DECK ea ue llei 8 decomposition LSP Simulation Code 1 DEDT nds Gab ce he IRS oe Dig fe an a Msi Aad aseo 150 deflection1 2_angle definition 117 deflection1 2_function definition 117 DELAY_BREAKDOWN compiler directives 16 DELAY_BREAKDOWN breakdown_function 113 DENSE medium thickness 80 DENSE ENERGY_DEPOSITION 17 density definition 74 density flags plasma definition 128 density flags density function plasma 127 density function plasma definition 127 desorption definition 0 119 desorption sample input 120 DESORPTION ON compiler directives 16 DESORPTION ON desorption 119 Diagnostic Output 40 diagnostic dump interval definition A1 diagnostic dump interval dump substrates flag 43 diagnostic dump interval Particle Diagnostics Input ccc sd ERR DRE ees ga tees 140 diagnostic dump interval Particle Targets PUE man BEA AN Naa 142 diagnostic dump steps definition 43 diagnostic dump times definition 44 diagnostics CHARGE_DENSITY 15 diagnostics dump_interval 41 diagnostics dump_steps 43 diagnostics dump substrates flag 43 diagnostics dump times se
109. LSP User s Manual and Reference For LSP Version 8 7 11 Aug 2005 R E Clark and T P Hughes Edited by Anat Sichel Copyright 1997 2005 Mission Research Corporation This document describes the pro cedures and parameters used for running the LSP code It is written in Texinfo format which generates both a TeX file for printed output and a GNU Info file for viewing on a character cell terminal An HTML version is generated using the texi2html utility of Lionel Cons CERN Texinfo and Info are distributed by the Free Software Foundation Inc Chapter 1 Introduction 1 1 Introduction The LSP code package consists of the LSP simulation code the GLSP graphical prepro cessor and the P4 graphical postprocessor This section gives a brief description of each of these codes and references some third party codes which can be used in conjunction with LSP The remainder of this document deals only with the LSP simulation code The pre and postprocessors have online documentation and the third party codes have their own manuals 1 1 LSP Simulation Code LSP is a 3 D electromagnetic particle in cell PIC code designed for large scale plasma simulations in either cartesian cylindrical or spherical coordinate systems It can also be used in 1 D and 2 D geometries The code is designed to perform on parallel as well as serial platforms On parallel processors domain decomposition with message passing is used to divide the computation
110. P User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes scalar_movie_interval Number of timesteps between scalar movie frames scalar_movie_interval_time Interval in user units between scalar movie frames scalar_movie_interval_ns Interval in ns between scalar movie frames scalar_movie_interval_cm Interval in units of 1 cm c where c is the velocity of light between scalar movie frames Default 1 e 9 no dumps 6 2 10 34 spatial_skip_x integer Spatial skip interval for the x coordinate direction in field dumps and scalar dumps Used to reduce the size of data dumps Default 1 no skipping 6 2 10 35 spatial_skip_y integer Spatial skip interval for the y coordinate direction in field dumps and scalar dumps Used to reduce the size of data dumps Default 1 no skipping 6 2 10 36 spatial_skip_z integer Spatial skip interval for the z coordinate direction in field dumps and scalar dumps Used to reduce the size of data dumps Default 1 no skipping 6 2 10 37 structure_output_format string Specifies the type of output format to be used for the structure output data dump which contains information on all conductor and dielectric structures in the simulation space This can have the values ASCII or BINARY The ASCII format is useful for reading printed output directly or for plotting with a graphical output utility such as gnuplot The BINARY format files are more compact and are intended for examin
111. R X Y compiler directives 15 CAR X Z compiler directives 15 CARBON Kam icra NG ns WA am Yn A irs 72 78 CARTESIAN compiler directives 15 170 LSP User s Manual and Reference centroidi amp 2 function definition 110 CGS Units oak dade seins ee 25 charge definiti0N o ooooooooooooooo 105 charge exchange Particle Interaction Data File AA LARA e centri oda 161 charge exchange Particle Interaction Input 138 CHARGE DENSITY compiler directives 15 CHARGE DENSITY dump charge density flag 40 CHARGE DENSITY dump rho background flag 43 CHARGE DENSITY scalar movie components 46 CHARGE DENSITY STATIC FIELDS 22 CHARGE DEPOSITION compiler directives 15 CHARGE DEPOSITION dump surface depositions flag 43 CHARGE DEPOSITION emission stimulated 114 charge factor stimulated definition 115 charge factor stimulated emission stimulated oec BLUR IPAE 114 charge factor definition 110 charge weight definition 133 Child Langmuir emission sample input 111 CIC cloud in cell EXTENDED_PARTICLES iP Seeded 17 CIC cloud in cell LSP Simulation Code 2 circuit definition lisse esses esses 67 circuit model sample input 85 Circuit Model Probes 04 155 Circuit Models Input
112. RC ABQ R 1763 Mission Research Corp November 1995 SBIR Contract No DE FG03 923481298 1I 2 LSP web site http www mrcabq com Chapter 1 Introduction 3 Development of GLSP was started by Tom Hughes in 1997 Since 1999 Chris Mostrom has been the primary developer Development is ongoing and currently includes tutorials in the form of movies to enhance ease of use These tutorials include beam_injection rodpinch rodpinch2 movie_making 1 3 P4 Postprocessor P4 is point and click postprocessor for LSP It is used to view and print the History Particle Vector and Scalar dumps from LSP It can also generate Particle and Scalar movies in multiple formats which can be viewed with other programs such as a Web browser or Apple Quicktime P4 is written in IDL and is cross platform capable It requires an IDL runtime license Development of P4 was started in 1996 by Tom Hughes Bob Clark and Ren Yao Bob Clark coded the first major release Since 1999 Chris Mostrom has been the primary developer in collaboration with Bob Clark and Tom Hughes 1 4 Integrated Tiger Series ITS Codes The Monte Carlo treatment of electron transport in materials see Section 6 9 Medium Models Input page 73 uses the physics kernel of the Integrated Tiger Series ITS codes developed by John Halbleib and co workers at Sandia National Laboratories and the Na tional Institute of Standards and Technology Using this part of LSP requires th
113. S eur te Eh On nem er 21 NUMBER DENSITIES 00000000000 eee 21 PARTICLE COLLAPSE dir iret dri 21 PRIMARY SPECIES 3 eese 21 QUASINEUTRAL_FIELDS o oo ooooocmooo o 21 SCATTERING ON rece Re da 21 SPATIAL FILTER ota ia ALALA AL 21 OPH ONEA a A dva ese ed d doe dera 21 OPH RETHa uisum ii blend 21 SPHERTCAL o diat A ex EM 22 STATIG FTELDS gu lieu E Re 22 STATIC FIELDS FFT2D es esee een 22 STIMULUS_DEPOSITION 00 22 STIMULUS SPEGIES R a tack atic 22 SUBCY CLING 0N 2 22 oi curte eem a Ad 22 TEMPORAL FILTER i22ssekew km dir iia 22 UNITS CO uscite Rd eR RR Ra 22 UNITS MKS sauer NIMIUM Ga 23 R E Clark and T P Hughes 4 4 61 USE_CONDUCTIVITY 0 004 23 4 4 62 USE OHMIC TERMS 0 cee eee o 23 4 4 63 USE PERMEABILITY s eere esee 23 4 4 64 USE_PERMITTIVITY 004 23 4 4 05 USE PYTHON ciutadans 23 4 4 66 USE SUBCELLS 21 2000 Reg rb hr bees 23 4 4 07 USE SUBSTRATES 121722154 ka dd tii i ai 23 LAB USE QEOS nde vig tes ere DAA 23 44 09 USELXSEGC rae ee agapan be eee ee er ee ees 24 4 4 70 VOLUME WEIGHTING sees nnn 24 5 User Units dana ente t IA rat a 25 DESPUES wei mm ie eer 25 52 MKS Didier ba 25 go oral WG il aka ka MUR E NE EE 25 6 Input Variables bod wo pe Mara uie Es 27 bil Titles Input ore idos n 29 6 2 Control Input couette A dee LE tene 30 6 2 1
114. STIMULUS_DEPOSITION 22 emission stimulated STIMULUS_SPECIES Seah 22 emission discrete_numbers 109 emittance Particle Measurement Probes 150 ENERGY DEPOSITION compiler directives 17 ENERGY_DEPOSITION dump_surface_depositions_flag 43 ENERGY DEPOSITION method 4 83 ENERGY DEPOSITION scalar movie components CANG PANG LANG AGA Ws dba ET PROP Que 46 energy loss definition 81 energy loss KELVIN_DEPOSITION 19 ENODE nG ANN REY EU t Ib PR d eren 148 episodes definition 133 Error Messages sese eee 10 error current filtering parameter definition rc 37 errors boundat y pde re Rua R 11 errors compilation 14 errors data type 0 0 cee eee ee eee eee 14 errors incompatible compiler directives 15 errors npt 4 esos pro we eee bee 11 errors non halting 10 errors unknown compiler directives 14 EXACT IMPLICIT compiler directives 17 EXACT IMPLICIT FULL SUSCEPTIBILITY 19 excitation definition 129 excitation sample input 129 EXTENDED PARTICLES compiler directives 17 EXTENDED_PARTICLES LSP Simulation Code 2 external fields sample input 100 External Fields Input 100 External Fields Input ATHETA Magnetic Field A e ahd pale ae 160 External Fields Input BFIELD Magnetic Field
115. Species Input page 104 6 17 7 3 medium integer Integer identifying the medium model associated with secondary emission See Sec tion 6 9 Medium Models Input page 73 6 17 8 backscatter The backscatter model is a multiple energy multiple angle treatment of particles which impinge upon a material surface which has been designated as a method 3 medium The species affected include secondary electrons as well as primaries although primaries are thereby converted into secondaries The necessary scattering tables must have been sup plied to the medium model on input The table format is given in Section 7 2 Method 3 Backscattering File page 157 The model specific parameters are described below Generic parameters are described in Section 6 17 1 Particle Creation Parameters page 109 Example backscatter from 0 0 0 0 O to 1 0 1 0 1 species 2 movie tag O movie fraction 0 0 x 0 0 The species number should be that of the secondaries 6 17 8 1 from to real For the backscatter model these coordinate parameters describe a volume of the sim ulation space over which the model is applied The cells within this volume which can cause particle creation are solid material cells only associated with a method 3 medium model 6 17 9 desorption Creates particles usually neutral species on exposed surfaces that are being struck by energetic electrons Use of this model requires that the compiler directive D
116. Temporal Parameters aaa 30 6 2 1 1 courant multiplier real 30 6 2 1 2 number of steps integer 30 6 2 1 3 timelimit real cou eere 31 6 2 1 4 time step real s cs oie SEXE ea 31 6 2 2 Simulation Restarts se cea eas oa iov ec 31 6 2 2 1 dump restart flag flag 31 6 2 2 2 maximum restart_dump time real 31 6 2 2 3 rename restart flag flag 32 6 2 2 4 restart interval real e zs ote pre aes 32 6 2 3 Parallel Processing essel eese 32 6 2 3 1 balance interval real 32 6 2 3 2 load balance flag fag 33 6 2 3 3 number of processes integer 33 6 2 3 4 region balance flag flag 33 6 2 3 5 initial balance flag flag 33 6 2 3 6 override balance flag flag 33 6 2 3 7 load timing interval integer 33 6 2 4 Field Solution and Modification 33 6 2 4 1 applied current real 34 6 2 4 2 background electron conductivity real En 34 6 2 4 3 background plasma density real 34 6 2 4 4 cold test flag Hag ierit 34 6 2 4 5 convergence iterations integer 34 6 2 4 6 convergence_tolerance real 34 6 2 4 7 dielectric kill flag fag 34 6 2 4 8 electric force filtering parameter real 35 ii LSP User s Manual and Reference 6 2 5 6 2 6 6 2 7 6 2 8 6 2 9 6 2
117. There are some syntax differences due to the differences between Perl and Tcl expressions e g the exponentiation operator is in Perl and pow in Tcl 8 2 Renumber Utility Various keywords in the LSP input file such as object and probe have integers ap pended to them The integer provides identification for the associated item but makes it inconvenient to insert new items since subsequent items must then be renumbered The renumber utility automates renumbering to renumber the probes in the file input 1sp type renumber probe input lsp The GLSP preprocessor see Section 1 2 GLSP Preprocessor page 2 does automatic renumbering 166 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes Chapter 9 References 167 9 References 1 M Chapman and E Waisman J Comp Phys 58 44 1985 2 B I Cohen A B Langdon and A Friedman J Comp Phys 46 15 1982 A B Langdon and D C Barnes Direct Implicit Plasma Simulation Multiple Time Scales edited by J U Brackbill and B I Cohen Academic Press Orlando FL 1985 p 335 3 Alex Friedman A Second order Implicit Particle Mover with Adjustable Damping J Comp Phys 90 292 1990 4 B B Godfrey Time biased Field Solver for Electromagnetic PIC Codes Presented at Ninth Conference on Numerical Simulation of Plasmas AMRC N 138 1980 5 J A Halbleib R P Kensek G D Valdez S M Seltzer and M J Berger
118. US option is used when the effect of the medium e g a gas cell extends over many particle steps This option is available for method 0 method 1 and method 4 medium models All others are considered to be type DENSE 6 9 3 dielectric constant real optional Assigns a relative dielectric constant to the medium thereby modeling a dielectric material when a value greater than 1 0 is specified The compiler directive USE PERMITTIVITY must be defined in order for this parameter to take effect see Section 4 4 64 USE PERMITTIVITY page 23 The default value of unity means no dielectric material is present Default 1 0 74 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes 6 9 4 surface conductivity real optional Assigns a surface conductivity to the medium if it is a dielectric The units are dependent upon which system of units has been specified by the user see Chapter 5 User Units page 25 Default 0 0 6 9 5 permeability real optional Assigns a relative magnetic permeability to the medium thereby modeling a param agnetic material when a value greater than 1 0 is specified The compiler directive USE_ PERMEABILITY must be defined in order for this parameter to take effect see Section 4 4 63 PERMEABILITY page 23 The default value of unity means no paramagnetic material is present Default 1 0 6 9 6 zero forces flag flag optional When zero forces flag on is used the field forces on p
119. UT P OE IHE ee dade es ohm capacribtsnce xs Gace NTO ANA pe estate tare NE yy tatur ied Spee esed nanofarad TnduCtance maa A e AAA A M Aras t at ste fete a nanohenry conductiVlbbty sueco NA Deest n aa RE iy eod adi edis inverse second MKS Units mass Hons in Uu ba em eur anat eaae aes irpo RU UU Dr quee kilogram time sce pw UNE mx saa GSES athe he Gos uev up p vie ge Second Tengtl jose O Do qs AAN meter Charge na paanan A ava A AAA ace a ta acis efe tO Mus dud coulomb CUITEN E 4 249 sexe eee cate s d a YR Da dpi s NA ad eq be aed ampere potential isi ace ESO td ib APR Gadel Bt atia EE ee y adds volt electric field ii a tb eae EVA S usa AG volt per meter magnetic field iii RS EXE a d aes A GMa kar fle eise dad tesla fierd energy Lu a AN aate AG ea AN aye ae qup E pt bd KANAN joule particle energy il ii ERE baked wk we RS electron volt temperature Xa kaa ai maan dede Im AT Ru d e Waves Ed aee kelvin resistance s L5 A Les ion ee dut eed uU pa MES eim ohm capacitance uw erences To del EU aA LES oi farad inducUance o e se aee entia de e t aeta ve a ura re aad vate aoa TO henry conductivity de AIO A ELA DANG inverse ohm meter CGS Units 26 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes length 25 vere eae be te bende abate aah ia ANN centimeter CHAP pe PDC Pp E M NG statcoulomb CULTORE 515055 Rb ESOS ILIA I NM BAT NET e ITA statampere potentiale A pea cct rd nde RATS Dn i statvolt electrico field oi sett kaye dr Awa m
120. X SPECIES which must be set equal to an integer greater than 1 see Section 4 4 44 NUMBER DENSITIES page 21 see Section 4 4 40 MAX SPECIES page 20 The atomic numbers for the species involved must be given in the Particle Species input section see Section 6 16 Particle Species Input page 104 The model specific parameters are described below Generic parameters are described in Section 6 17 1 Particle Creation Parameters page 109 124 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes Example higherstate from 0 0 0 0 0 0 to 5 0 5 0 10 0 interval 10 Species 2 movie tag O electron species 4 movie tag O ionization potential 10 0 eV Cross sections 0 0 2 0e 16 function 5 0 0 end movie fraction 0 0 Stripping cross sections are given for each species acting on the species being stripped to the next higher charge state The number of entries must equal the number of species defined in the Particle Species input section see Section 6 16 Particle Species Input page 104 6 17 11 1 from to real For the higherstate model these coordinate parameters describe a volume of the sim ulation space over which the model is applied 6 17 11 2 ionization potential real Ionization potential of the species atom in eV T his parameter when a non zero value is specified is used to evaluate a probability for field ionization This is in addition to or instead of the stripping due
121. _COLLAPSE page 21 Example Particle Collapse collapsel interval 500 species 1 threshold 75000 maximum_number 20 tolerance 0 001 lower_cutoff 0 0 upper_cutoff 0 7 6 18 1 interval integer The interval parameter specifies the time step interval between possible attempts to undergo the particle collapse process depending on whether the threshold criterion is met 6 18 2 threshold integer The threshold parameter specifies the total number of particles that the species must reach in order to initiate particle collapse 6 18 3 maximum number integer This is the number of particles per cell which the collapse algorithm attempts to produce If the number of particles in a cell is less than this to begin with then no particles are combined in that cell 6 18 4 tolerance real In order for two particles to combine the square of the difference in their velocities divided by their average velocity must be less than the tolerance parameter 6 18 5 lower cutoff real Particles with charge weight smaller than this fraction of the largest particle weight in a cell are not eligible for combination 6 18 6 upper cutoff real Particles with charge weight larger than this fraction of the largest particle weight in a cell are not eligible for combination Chapter 6 Input Variables 135 6 19 Particle Migration Input The Particle Migration section specifies parameters which control particle migra tion between k
122. al function injection definition 116 spatial function injection Functions Input m 144 spatial function medium definition 76 spatial function order 103 spatial function symmetry direction 103 spatial function type external field 101 Spatial momentum function definition 117 Spatial skip x definition 48 spatial skip y definition 48 Spatial skip z definition 48 species ionization definition 123 species medium definition 76 species photoionization definition 126 species definition 109 species electron_probability 82 species monolayers esses 121 species Particle Species Input 104 species photoionization 124 Species production factor 126 species stimulated cross sectim 121 species1 method 3 cee eee 82 speciesA definition 119 speciesA positron_probability 82 183 Specific heat la Bi lah EDO 72 SPH ONE compiler directives 21 SPH R TH compiler directives 21 SPHERE definition o o oooooooooooo 61 SPHERE sample input 05 61 SPHERICAL compiler directives 22 Spitzer collisions Particle Int
123. al load among the processors A unified decomposition of fields and particles is used i e the particles reside on the same processor as the domain they occupy The standard message passing interface MPI is used for inter process communication The decomposition scheme is based on a two level hierarchy The problem space is first divided into regions which are volumes that are conformal to the coordinate grid Each region is then divided into domains by one dimensional slicing along any one of the coordinate directions The slicing direction can be different in each region This method is flexible enough to deal with complex geometries while at the same time minimizing the number of processors needed at any given time It has been found to be faster than a general 3 D decomposition A queueing algorithm is used to manage inter domain and inter region communication processors send a signal to a designated region or global master processor indicating the processors needed The master processors maintain a queue of processes which are ready and signal the process pairs to exchange relevant data LSP is written in C using an object oriented style Thus there are classes for Grid Cell Field and Particle objects consisting of data structures and member functions which operate on the data Message passing and physics functions are kept separate The design allows new physics models to be added in a systematic manner Memory al
124. allelepiped using the from coordinates as one of the corners and three sets of to coordinates which give the end points of the three edges that extend from that corner Coordinate system independent shape Example object6 PARALLELEPIPED cathode conductor on medium 1 potential 0 from 1 0 1 0 2 5 to 1 0 1 0 2 5 to 1 0 1 00 5 to 1 0 1 0 5 0 6 5 8 TRILATERAL Defines a 2 D triangle which is then swept in the direction normal to the plane in which it lies This figure is specified using three sets of coordinates the first designated by the from keyword followed by two to sets of coordinates defining the three corners of the triangle and finally the designated sweep direction X Y Z This is a little redundant but is meant to emphasize the fact that the result is a solid three dimensional figure Coordinate system dependent shape Example object3 TRILATERAL conductor on medium O potential 0 from 10 0 0 0 0 0 to 5 0 0 0 0 0 to 10 0 0 0 3 75 sweep_direction Y 6 5 9 QUADRILATERAL Defines a 2 D quadrilateral which is then swept in the direction normal to the plane of the quadrilateral The quadrilateral is specified using the from coordinates to give one of the corners followed by three sets of to coordinates giving the other three corners in the order adjacent corner opposite corner adjacent corner Coordinate system dependent shape Example object2 QUADRILATERAL upper anode conductor on medium 0 pot
125. als Allows for user specified materials beyond those which are available internally Medium Models Specifies material properties associated with structural objects defined in the Objects section Circuit Models Circuit models used as adjuncts to the simulation grid Volume Models Grid conformal rectangular regions of dielectrics magnetic materials current drive etc Liner Models Parameters for a simple imploding liner Subgrid Models Specifies parameters for the so called subgrid models such as a smooth slope Substrate Models Neutral ion source model for a metallic plate embedded in a ceramic material External Fields Specifies externally applied electric and or magnetic fields Particle Species Specifies parameters such as charge mass etc for each particle species present required for particles 28 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes Particle Creation Particle generation models injection emission etc required for particles Particle Collapse Control parameters for reduction of particle number by coalescence of macro particles Particle Migration Control parameters for electron migration between kinetic and fluid states Particle Extraction Used to generate data files of particles crossing specified planes e g for sub sequent use in a slice transport code or as input to LSP using the fileread option Particle Interaction Controls interactions between partic
126. and linked Once a makefile lsp mak has been generated by VC Project Export Makefile compiler directives can be input by either using the Perl script 1spmake bat or by typing them into the Project Settings window The compiler directives are typed into the file make pc in the source directory e g CYL_R_Z EXTERNAL BFIELDS KELVIN_DEPOSITION MULTI PROCESS Make pc is read by Lspmake bat If the compiler directives have been changed since the last compile then type 1spmake d clean followed by 1spmake d in the source directory Use the d option for the Debug instead of the Release version Note The clean step is not needed unless compiler directives have changed In addition if the VC environment variables have not been set at boot time the file VCVARS32 BAT generated during installation of VC should be run before using lspmake bat 4 3 Error Messages Generated by Incorrect Compilation 4 3 1 Data Type Errors LSP requires the various data types in C to have specific sizes Therefore data types are checked to ensure that the size specification is correct Often the problem is with the long int data type which must be 8 bytes On many systems the data type having that size is long long int To accomplish this globally the user must simply define the compiler directive LONG LONG INT see Section 4 4 34 LONG LONG INT page 19 4 3 2 Unknown Compiler Directive Err
127. and particle advance which is an implementation of the fully damped D1 scheme Ref 2 Note that DIRECT IMPLICIT implies IMPLICIT FIELDS as long as STATIC FIELDS is not defined See Section 4 4 30 IMPLICIT FIELDS page 19 Chapter 4 Compiling LSP 17 4 4 17 DOUBLE_PRECISION Use double precision for all floating point operations 4 4 18 DYNAMIC_FIELDS Solve the electromagnetic fields with one of the dynamic field solvers explicit or implicit This option is the default and is necessary only if the fields are pre calculated with a static field solver prior to advancing the simulation electromagnetically See Section 6 2 4 11 field initialization flag page 35 4 4 19 ENERGY DEPOSITION Enables energy deposition on dense material surfaces or in a tenuous gas This is used in conjunction with certain medium models specifically the method 1 model of either DENSE or TENUOUS type and the method 4 model of TENUOUS type only see Section 6 9 Medium Models Input page 73 4 4 20 EXACT IMPLICIT Solve electromagnetic fields using the unconditionally stable ADI procedure as opposed to the conventional ADI scheme which is iterative in nature and not necessarily stable This directive can be used as a replacement for the IMPLICIT FIELDS directive which invokes the conventional solution when used alone see Section 4 4 30 IMPLICIT FIELDS page 19 4 4 21 EXTENDED PARTICLES Enables the extended particle CIC model in which t
128. and the normal parameter should be set to XIYIZ to give the direction of injection 6 17 6 2 temporal function integer Integer identifying the function used to specify the time dependence of the beam current density See Section 6 24 Functions Input page 144 6 17 6 3 spatial function integer Integer identifying the function used to specify the spatial dependence of the beam den sity Used in conjunction with the reference point and spatial flags parameters The spatial function is multiplied by the temporal function to form a complete description of the beam s current density Therefore the function value should be set to unity if there is no spatial dependence Typically this function is intended to specify the radial depen dence of the injected particle beam However a 2 D function may be specified for more complex beam cross sections This function is optional and is ignored when the index is Chapter 6 Input Variables 117 set to zero See Section 6 24 Functions Input page 144 See Section 6 24 Functions Input page 144 6 17 6 4 radius_function integer optional Integer identifying the function used to specify the temporal dependence of the beam radius Used in conjunction with the reference_point and spatial_flags parameters The radius_function truncates the radial extent of the beam regardless of the description given by the spatial_function This function is optional and is ignored when the index is
129. appear in the same instance of a Particle Creation Input 6 17 1 10 drift velocity real Specifies constant velocity values in the X Y Z directions which are applied to every particle in user units length time This parameter conflicts with the drift momentum parameter and they should not both appear in the same instance of a Particle Creation Input 6 17 1 11 random flag If ON randomize the particle initial position within the cell where it is created 6 17 1 12 medium integer optional Specifies a medium index for which the model is applied that is only those cells which contain that specific medium identifier will participate in the process associated with the model The parameter appears in this form for the emission and desorption models When it is not used or set to 0 it is ignored and all cells within the defined volume will participate Note that other particle creation models may contain medium identifiers which are mandatory in which case they are listed in their appropriate Particle Creation Input subsections 6 17 1 13 charge factor real optional A multiplier applied to the emitted charge after it has been calculated from the appro priate model This can be used to suppress particle creation when desirable Chapter 6 Input Variables 111 6 17 1 14 thermal energy real optional Thermal energy in eV used to add a Gaussian distribution to the momentum or to set the temperature in the case of a flui
130. ark and T P Hughes 6 24 Functions Input Functions of a single variable are useful in specifying temporal and spatial profiles for fields and particles Several analytic functions are available in addition to tabulated nu merical data Functions are referred to in other input sections by the integer index which is appended to the keyword function e g the expression temporal_function 3 in the External Fields section means use the function3 entry in the Functions section For a temporal function the independent variable is assumed to be in units of time while for a spatial function the independent variable is in units of length These units are depen dent upon which system of units has been specified by the user see Chapter 5 User Units page 25 Also there is the option to specify functions of two or three independent variables which can be used in certain instances such as the description of the spatial dependence for the current density of an injected particle beam see Section 6 17 6 3 spatial_function injection page 116 A tabulated type 0 function definition has the form functionl tabulated function type O data_pairs 0 0 1 0 0 125 1 0 0 1251 0 0 end sampling function no resolution number O where the data values are given between the data pairs and end keywords the first column is the independent variable and the second is the function value Note the optional qualifiers at the end of the sequence If set t
131. articles inside the medium are set to zero This is a refinement which results in more accurate calculation of particle energies This parameter is optional because it should not be used when there is any particle emission also taking place on the surface of the medium Default OFF 6 9 7 density real Mass density of a solid material in user units see Chapter 5 User Units page 25 6 9 8 transparency real optional Transparency of a solid material mesh as opposed to a foil This is the fraction of par ticles which pass through without being scattered This parameter applies only to method 1 and method 2 models but cannot be used with method 4 since that method involves de tailed particle tracking This is a probablistic parameter The default value of zero causes the scattering process to be applied to all particles Default 0 0 6 9 9 temperature real optional Initial temperature of the medium in kelvins This parameter applies to method 0 method 1 method 3 and method 4 models The default value is 300 degrees kelvin Default 300 0 Chapter 6 Input Variables 75 6 9 10 gas_material string Specifies the composition of the gaseous medium using the format gas_material NAME where NAME is a material name from the list below The material names currently available are e helium e air e neon e argon e krypton e fluorine e xenon e sf6 This parameter is required for the gas conductivity model an
132. at which the simulation stops running time_limit_ns Total physical time in ns to run the simulation time_limit_cm Total physical time to run the simulation in units of 1 cm c where c is the velocity of light Since relativistic electrons travel at about c this is sometimes a convenient way of specifying the simulation time The value of number_of_steps if it is reached first takes precedence over time_limit 6 2 1 4 time step real Options for this parameter are time step Physical timestep in user units time step ns Physical timestep in ns time step cm Physical timestep in units of 1 cm c where c is the velocity of light Since relativistic electrons travel at about c this is sometimes a convenient way of specifying the timestep 6 2 2 Simulation Restarts 6 2 2 1 dump restart flag flag If dump restart flag is ON automatically dump the restart file s at the end of the simulation that is at termination time see Section 6 2 1 3 time limit page 31 Default OFF 6 2 2 2 maximum restart dump time real Maximum wall clock time between restart dumps in hours Default 1 e9 hours i e infinite 32 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes 6 2 2 3 rename restart flag flag If rename restart flag is ON alternate the filename extension on successive restart dumps between dat and alt This is a safety measure in case the run is interrupted unintentionally during the o
133. ation sample input 135 cle Migration Input 135 cle Migration Input fluid migration interval 39 cle Migration Input kinetic migration interval 39 cle Migration Input migrant species flag ica unb pagus NG ede 106 particle species sample input 104 180 LSP User s Manual and Reference Particle Species Input o o ooooo o oo 104 Particle Species Input electron species 109 Particle Species Input FLUID_PHYSICS 18 Particle Species Input Global Particle Probes a A ada A 153 Particle Species Input higherstate 123 124 Particle Species Input ionization 122 Particle Species Input ionization_factors 123 Particle Species Input Particle Extraction Input o o A reli et 137 Particle Species Input Particle Measurement Probes aro pa 151 Particle Species Input Particle Slice Probes 153 Particle Species Input photoionization 124 Particle Species Input production rates 123 Particle Species Input species 109 Particle Species Input speciesA 119 Particle Species Input stimulating species n 115 Particle Targets sample input 142 Particle Targets Input 142 Particle Targets Input target movie interval REIS en T E E ee NER 49 particle in cell PIC 1 particle in cell PIC LSP Simulation Code 2 Particle Measurem
134. ation using the P4 postprocessor see Section 1 3 P4 Postprocessor page 3 The ASCII format file will have the name struct dat to distinguish it from the BINARY version which will have the name struct p4 An example is structure_output_format ASCII Default BINARY Chapter 6 Input Variables 49 6 2 10 38 target movie interval integer This parameter when used will cause a different kind of output from the usual target dumps That is because it is a movie interval it is intended to be quite short and all the data is output sequentially onto a single file while being refreshed after each dump so that the resulting data can be treated as a streak image when displayed properly Note that while the usual target dumps described for target models see Section 6 23 Particle Targets Input page 142 will still appear they will not contain cumulative data and therefore may not be useful Options for this parameter are target movie interval Number of timesteps between target movie frames target movie interval time Interval in user units between target movie frames target movie interval ns Interval in ns between target movie frames target movie interval cm Interval in units of 1 cm c where c is the velocity of light between target movie frames Default infinite no dumps 6 2 10 39 target output format string Specifies the type of output format to be used in the target model data dumps This
135. axis A value of zero means that if the polar axis is Z and the azimuthal axis is X then the normal to the surface is in the X Z plane The user must ensure that the angle is consistent with the actual simulation geometry AXIS can take the values X Y Z but must not be the same as the polar axis The format is azimuthal angle AXIS ANGLE 6 9 23 extract photons flag flag optional Selectively turns the extraction of photons on or off for this instance of a method 4 medium model The default value is whatever the extract photons flag is set to in the Control section of input see Section 6 2 Control Input page 30 6 9 24 extract primaries flag flag optional Selectively turns the extraction of primaries on or off for this instance of a method 4 medium model The default value is whatever the extract primaries flag is set to in the Control section of input see Section 6 2 Control Input page 30 6 9 25 extract secondaries flag flag optional Selectively turns the extraction of secondaries on or off for this instance of a method 4 medium model The default value is whatever the extract secondaries flag is set to in the Control section of input see Section 6 2 Control Input page 30 78 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes 6 9 26 collision_energies integer Number of energies between minimum_energy and maximum_energy in internal energy loss and scattering tables Interpolation
136. ba ixl bea bra e statvolt per cm magnetic field seve NAA La SN NDI DANG bus evan veu gauss field Onerbgy utet uude act i ce nns entere eue a brad Usi dod dodi qe erg particle energy a ehh han electron volt temperature eat da unos eleg pala sid e Ei pide dis kelvin TosiStance c oss trac ed ost dos e RE Eo rats Second per cm CAPACITANCE iu aaa atada dae aed de centimeter TNAUCTANCE a a ttl A A e pd Square second per cm conductivity cis ie ningun dulce eddie E si bb bd inverse second Chapter 6 Input Variables 27 6 Input Variables The input file is divided up into a number of sections dealing with various aspects of simulation design Each section consists of a section header contained in square brackets followed by the input parameters belonging to that section Sections are not required unless so noted Title Simulation title which when specified overrides the default code generated title Control Timestep time limit algorithmic and diagnostic parameters required Grid Defines overall simulation grid coordinates and spacing required Regions Specifies zones into which the simulation space is broken up Objects Geometrically shaped objects which describe the simulation structure Boundaries Boundary conditions on the simulation other than conducting boundaries which are specified in the Objects section Potentials Iteration parameters and boundary values for the electrostatic field solver Materi
137. be more convenient for containing a large amount of data The data may be preceded by any number of comment lines beginning with In addition two more optional parameters are available which act as multipliers to the data of either variable This makes it convenient to use data generated in a different system of units for example In the case of function type 40 which is a 2 D function the format is functionl type 40 data file beam dat independent variable multiplier 1 0 dependent variable multiplier 1 0 which designates the file containing the 2 D data in ASCII format The multipliers are the same as defined for type 30 above The data is arranged in the following order assuming that the data is to be utilized in the x y plane optional comment lines beginning with i nx ny integer number of data points in x and y directions x 1 x nx x coordinate data y 1 y ny y coordinate data values 1 1 values 1 nx values of dependent variable in x and y values ny 1 values ny nx The following table lists the analytic functions and their coefficients The independent variable is denoted by x 1 constant 1 coefficient CO 2 power term 2 coefficients COx x C1 3 single pulse 2 coefficients CO magnitude C1 pulse duration 146 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes linear times exponential
138. ber of steps definition 30 number of steps Single Processor Machines 7 number of steps time limit 31 Numerical Checks and Reports 49 O object sample input 00 5T Object Orders uc Sees ge ebd data 57 object properties Objects Input 56 object oriented coding e eee e eee 1 Objects put dotarse ada 56 Objects Input Boundaries Input 63 Objects Input dielectric 94 Objects Input Medium Models Input 73 Objects Input paramagnetic 96 Objects Input potentials 66 Objects Input Potentials Input 71 Objects Input Subgrid Models Input 98 Ohm s Law conductivity 93 Ohm s Law conductivity medium 76 omega definitiON oooooooooommmmo oo 118 order definition isses esses cece eee 103 outer radius definition 67 Outlet Boundaries defined 63 Outlet Boundaries Circuit Models Input 85 Outlet Boundaries Objects Input 56 output file extN dat o o ooooo 137 output file history p4 Probes Input 148 output file history p4 Single Processor Machines iren dose pp ea nea if output file log Single Processor Machines 7 output file Isp dvi 0 eee eee 13 output iles Isp ps eslav
139. bles 80 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes Medium Models Slanted surface target mediumi method 1 type DENSE dielectric constant 1 0 density 8 96 g cc for Cu thickness 10 0 temperature 300 0 collision energies 40 minimum energy 1 6e8 eV maximum energy 2 0e8 eV Scattering on Scatter angles 20 poloidal angles 20 energy loss on components copper fraction 1 0 end Example of a tenuous gas medium using the conductivity model Medium Models mediumi method 1 type TENUOUS Species 1 gas density 1 186e16 1 cc for air at 1 torr Spatial function O reference point 0 0 Spatial flags 0 0 0 conductivity on electron density 3 5e7 1 cc temperature 300 collision energies 40 minimum energy 1 6e8 eV maximum energy 2 0e8 eV Scattering off energy loss off components air fraction 1 0 end O x 6 9 31 1 thickness real optional Specifies the medium thickness in units of length where a foil model is intended This is the critical parameter in determining the effect on particles passing through the foil rather than by any dimensions specified for an object usually one cell thick in the Objects section that is associated with the foil model For boundaries where one just wants to compute the surface temperature rise one can use an arbitrarily large value Present only for a DENSE medium Chapter 6 Input Variables 81 6 9 31 2 scattering flag
140. bsorption is ON the boundary does not absorb any outgoing scattered wave present T his may be useful under some conditions but must be used with caution as it can cause instability of the simulation Default OFF 6 6 1 4 drive model string Specifies the type of wave to be launched into the simulation space NONE No incoming wave POTENTIAL Uses a numerical solution for the potential This is generally more versatile to use than the ANALYTIC_TEM type The only restriction on this drive model is that the spatial extent of the outlet boundary must be contained within a single grid instance see Section 6 3 Grid Input page 52 ANALYTIC_TEM Uses an analytic TEM transverse electromagnetic wave solution for either flat or coaxial electrodes In this case the voltage applied is understood to be that of the electrode at the lower coordinate relative to the one at the higher coordinate or the inner electrode to the outer one The only advantage of this model over the POTENTIAL type is that it can span more than one grid WAVEGUIDE Uses an analytic TE transverse electric or TM wave transverse magnetic solution for either rectangular or circular electrodes LASER A special analytic Gaussian function is used to approximate a focused con vergent wave from a laser source Only the wavelength and spot size defined as the gaussian radius are entered as coefficients in the function All other parameters such as beam waist loca
141. c tivity are dependent on which system of units has been specified by the user see Chapter 5 User Units page 25 6 11 2 dielectric The dielectric model creates a specified volume of material with a spatially uniform value of permittivity The format is volume2 dielectric from XMIN YMIN ZMIN to XMAX YMAX ZMAX dielectric constant VALUE x temporal function N 94 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes where XMIN YMIN ZMIN XMAX YMAX ZMAX are diagonally opposite corners of the volume VALUE is the relative dielectric constant and N is the function index specifying the time dependence of the dielectric value multiplier see Section 6 24 Functions Input page 144 When using this model with the ADI field solver see Section 4 4 30 IMPLICIT_FIELDS page 19 the compiler directive USE PERMITTIVITY must be defined See Section 4 4 64 USE PERMITTIVITY page 23 A more general way to specify dielectric materials is through a medium model associated with structural objects see Section 6 5 Objects Input page 56 6 11 3 dipole The dipole model places an externally applied current density within the specified vol ume The format is volumel dipole COMP from XMIN YMIN ZMIN to XMAX YMAX ZMAX total current VALUE temporal function M secondary function S Spatial function N reference point RX RY RZ spatial_flags LX LY LZ whe
142. ched to an outlet boundary Instances of the circuit model are identified by appending an integer index to the circuit keyword This index is used as the identifier wherever the circuit model is referred to elsewhere in the input description For the static type the specified circuit model is associated with the electrostatic fields through the Potentials section of input see Section 6 7 Potentials Input page 71 The source voltage is a constant unless a voltage_function is specified which takes precedence The static circuit model can be defined as an open circuit which has only capacitance or an R C circuit which also has an associated resistance Example Potentials potentiall 0 0 potential2 1 0 circuit 1 Circuit Models circuiti static capacitance 0 0 resistance 4 0 4 ohms voltage 1000 0 voltage function O The transmission line type of circuit model consists of a sequence of sections each with a defined impedance the end of which is attached to an outlet boundary see Sec tion 6 6 1 Outlet Boundaries page 63 This is commonly used to model the changes of impedance in the various stages of a pulsed power transmission line leading up to the device being modeled in the simulation Example Boundaries outlet from 10 0 10 0 0 0 to 10 0 10 0 0 0 phase velocity 1 drive model POTENTIAL potentials 1 0 0 2 1 0 end 86 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes circuit 1
143. cies l entry in the Particle Species input section see Section 6 16 Particle Species Input page 104 which should therefore contain the next higher charge state The model specific parameters are described below Generic parameters are described in Section 6 17 1 Particle Creation Parameters page 109 Example of the EXTERNAL SOURCE model photoionization model EXTERNAL SOURCE from 5 0 5 0 0 0 to 5 0 5 0 20 0 interval 1 species 3 movie tag O x electron species 2 movie tag O x production factor 0 2 reference point 0 0 0 0 10 0 source radius 0 5 ionization potential 13 6 eV temporal function 3 for source temperature cross section file F NFF movie fraction 0 0 Example of the AMBIENT FIELD model photoionization model AMBIENT FIELD from 5 0 5 0 5 0 to 5 0 5 0 5 0 interval 1 Species 3 movie tag O electron species 2 movie tag O production factor 1 0 movie fraction 0 0 6 17 12 1 model string Two different models of photoionization are available EXTERNAL SOURCE and AMBIENT FIELD 126 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes 6 17 12 2 from to real For the photoionization model these coordinate parameters describe a volume of the simulation space over which photoionization is applied 6 17 12 3 species integer Integer identifying the species to be photoionized usually neutral 6 17 12 4 production_factor real The probability
144. compiler directives EXTERNAL_BFIELDS or EXTERNAL_EFIELDS must be defined at compilation time depending on which of those fields are indicated by the field parameter described below see Sec tion 4 4 22 EXTERNAL_BFIELDS page 17 see Section 4 4 23 EXTERNAL_EFIELDS page 18 Also note that the use of multiple instances of either of these types of the same field requires that the definition of EXTERNAL BFIELDS or EXTERNAL_EFIELDS is set to the number of instances requested on input 6 15 2 field string Specifies an external magnetic or electric field BIE The format for this parameter when the COMPONENT option is in effect is field B X Y Z VALUE which specifies the value VALUE for the X Y Z component of the external magnetic field or field E X Y Z VALUE which specifies the value VALUE for the XIY Z component of the external electric field For the ANALYTIC option a VALUE does not appear For the DATAFILE option this parameter need not appear since all of the file options involve only magnetic fields where FILENAME is the name of the datafile The various file formats are given in Chapter 7 File Formats page 157 For the BFIELD specification the optional keyword FORMAT may be present to indicate that the file is either type ASCII or binary with ASCII being the default 6 15 3 format string optional Format for data file to be read ASCII or binary Default ASCII 6 15 4 from to real opt
145. d is appropriate only for a TENUOUS medium type However the components parameter may be used instead see below 6 9 11 air_model string optional Specifies the choice between two conductivity models available for air This can be either GENERIC or EEDF The first was developed for general use with beam transport simulations and the second has been used for microwave stimulation without beam impact ionization Present only for a TENUOUS medium type In order to use this option the USE OHMIC TERMS compiler directive must be defined see Section 4 4 62 USE OHMIC TERMS page 23 Default GENERIC 6 9 12 water content real optional Specifies the amount of water vapour present when using the EEDF option for the con ductivity model of air This is expressed as the number density fraction of the total and can have values between 0 0 and 0 04 Present only for a TENUOUS medium type In order to use this option the USE OHMIC TERMS compiler directive must be defined see Section 4 4 62 USE OHMIC TERMS page 23 Default 0 0 6 9 13 diffusion length real optional Specifies the characteristic diffusion length for any diffusion terms if present in the conductivity model The diffusion term is active for helium air and argon gasses only Present only for a TENUOUS medium type In order to use this option the USE_OHMIC_ TERMS compiler directive must be defined see Section 4 4 62 USE OHMIC TERMS page 23 Default
146. d method 1 models only 6 9 17 reference point real optional A vector which sets the reference point for the spatial dependence function This must be present when the spatial function parameter is used unless its value is 0 Available for the method 0 and method 1 models only 6 9 18 spatial flags flag optional A set of integers with values 0 no or 1 yes indicating the dimensions X Y Z on which the spatial dependence function is based If more than one of these are set to 1 simultaneously then the spatial dependence is radial from the reference point This must be present when the spatial function parameter is used unless its value is 0 Available for the method 0 and method 1 models only 6 9 19 conductivity flag optional If conductivity is ON a plasma current is generated using an Ohm s Law model The conductivity is computed from the electron density and the collision frequency The elec tron density has contributions from beam impact and avalanche ionization Both electron neutral and electron ion Coulomb collisions are included in the collision frequency At present this model has been implemented for gas materials helium air neon argon krypton fluorine xenon sf6 and an argon krypton fluorine mixture see Section 6 9 29 components page 78 The last one was developed for the KrF laser device Present only Chapter 6 Input Variables 77 for a TENUOUS medium type In order to use this option
147. d species Default 0 0 6 17 1 15 slice times integer optional A list of times in user units at which injected particles from either the injection or fileread models are tagged for particle slice diagnostics see Section 6 25 4 Particle Slice Probes page 153 6 17 1 16 movie tag integer optional Integer 0 lt movie tag lt 8 used to identify the particles created with the current model in the movie file See Section 1 3 P4 Postprocessor page 3 Default 0 no tag 6 17 1 17 movie fraction real optional Fraction of particles created which will be tagged for output to the movie file See Section 1 3 P4 Postprocessor page 3 Default 0 0 no particles tagged 6 17 2 emission child langmuir Child Langmuir emission is the standard space charge limited emission model There are two sub models which differ only in the method used to determine the onset of emis sion These are the field stress and thermal breakdown methods see Section 6 17 2 3 threshold emission page 113 Use of the thermal breakdown method requires that the compiler directive KELVIN_DEPOSITION be defined see Section 4 4 33 KELVIN DEPOSITION page 19 Model specific parameters are described below Generic parameters are described in Section 6 17 1 Particle Creation Parameters page 109 Example of Child Langmuir emission emission child langmuir field stress from 6 9 0 0 0 8 to 7 35 6 283 1 95 interval 2 sp
148. d tail of the distribution then a comment line and the fitting parameters A and m The parameter A is normalized so that the integral f AE dE gives the relative yield from the tail of the distribution i e the fraction of backscattered electrons that come from the tail Relative yield fraction from extrapolation 0 00629612126033918 Fitting parameters A m normalized to give relative yield 0 00291911818959786 0 148920337349297 Next follows one comment line the dimension of the lookup table 2 i e energy and angle the number of scattered energies in the table 20 in the example below the minimum scattered energy 2041 5 eV the maximum scattered energy 5 0e5 eV which is equal to the incident energy the number of scattered angles in the table 20 the minimum scattered angle pi 2 and the maximum scattered angle pi Table dimensions 2 Chapter 7 File Formats 159 20 2041 5 5 0e5 20 1 5708 3 14159 Next is a comment line followed by the lookup table itself This consists of a 1 D array of scattered energies E and a 2 D array of scattered angles 67 such that using randomly generated indices i for energy and j for angle into these arrays gives energies and angles which reproduce the scattered distribution The arrays are written out in the sequence EPS SL tx 9 cs ete Table 2041 5 1 5708 1 79096 The part of the scattered distribution below the minimum table energy 2041 5 eV in thi
149. d to particles The value in the range 0 1 multiplies the old electric field This parameter should not be used with implicit particles that is when the DIRECT_IMPLICIT compiler option is defined see Section 4 4 16 DIRECT_IMPLICIT page 16 Default 0 0 no filtering 6 2 4 9 electric_spatial_filtering_parameter real Diffusion coefficient for spatial damping applied to electric field advance in the explicit field solver Ref 1 Typical values are in the range 0 1 to 0 25 Default 0 0 no filtering 6 2 4 10 field advance flag flag If field advance flag is OFF run the simulation without advancing the fields Particles are created and advanced in whatever fields exist when the simulation starts Default ON 6 2 4 11 field initialization flag flag If field initialization flag is ON initialize the fields with one of the static solu tions prior to temporal advancement with a dynamic field solver This can be useful for some simulations such as pre setting a potential across charged plates and then proceeding from that point with a fully electromagnetic field solution Use of this option is the only instance where both the STATIC FIELDS and DYNAMIC FIELDS compiler options are used concurrently see Section 4 4 53 STATIC FIELDS page 22 and see Section 4 4 18 DYNAMIC_ FIELDS page 17 Default OFF 6 2 4 12 ion conductivity factor real This parameter is used in the quasi neutral field solution to set the va
150. d to the opposite end that is toward the simulation grid liner radius the inner radius of an associated liner model which is assumed to contract as the liner implodes forward voltage in forward traveling voltage at the initial end of a network element or a transmission line segment forward voltage out forward traveling voltage at the opposite end of a network element or a transmission line segment backward voltage in backward traveling voltage at the initial end of a network element or a transmission line segment backward voltage out backward traveling voltage at the opposite end of a network element or a transmission line segment When the circuit referred to is a transmission line the word segment can be used instead of element When the circuit is a static one the word element and its number is omitted altogether Also for static circuits only the voltage and current measurements are relevant 156 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes Chapter 7 File Formats 157 7 File Formats This section describes the format of external datafiles used by LSP They must be created prior to an LSP run are specified in the input file and must reside in the same directory as the input file 7 1 Method 2 Scattering File The format of the method 2 see Section 6 9 32 method 2 page 81 scattering tables is as follows The first line is a comment The next line gives the dimension of the lookup tab
151. e Processor Machines 7 Message Passing Interface MPI Workstation Neuwork ce RI PERRA pee ev 8 method medium definition 73 method O definition 79 method 0 dump_ohmic_quantities_flag 42 method 0 gas density sees eese 76 method O temperature 74 method 1 definition 79 method 1 desorption sese eee 119 method 1 dump ohmic quantities flag 42 method 1 ENERGY_DEPOSITION 17 method 1 gas density sees esses 76 method 1 KELVIN_DEPOSITION 19 method 1 polar_angle o oo ooooooooo o 77 method 1 species medium 76 method 1 temperature 74 method 1 transparency 004 74 method 2 definition 81 Method 2 Scattering File 157 Method 2 Scattering File sample file 157 Method 2 Scattering File electron data file TL PCI 82 Method 2 Scattering File positron data file Tr CER M P 82 Method 2 Scattering File primary data file 82 method 2 from to secondary 119 method 2 Method 2 Scattering File 157 method 2 Particle Creation Input 108 method 2 polar angle sees 77 method 2 PRIMARY_SPECIES 21 method 2 secondary s esses 118 method 2 speciesA i e sese 119 method 2 transparency sees 74 m
152. e Section 4 4 41 MULTI PROCESS page 20 Multiple regions are numbered consecutively in the input file regioni region2 region3 Each region assuming 3 D has the following format regioni xmin XMIN xmax XMAX ymin YMIN ymax YMAX zmin ZMIN zmax ZMAX number of domains NDOM Split direction DIR number of cells NCELLS where XMIN XMAX YMIN YMAX ZMIN ZMAX are the coordinate limits of the region and should not exceed the limits of the defined grid in the Grid section of input In cylindrical and spherical coordinates x can be replaced by r and y can be replaced by th In spherical coordinates z can be replaced by phi Spatial dimensions are in units of length except for rotational coordinates the y or th coordinates in cylindrical or spherical geometries and the z or phi coordinates in spherical geometry which are in radians The units of length are dependent upon which system of units has been specified by the user see Chapter 5 User Units page 25 For 1 D and 2 D simulations the coordinates not used in the simulation are ignored and are not required in the definition of the grid All coordinates are optional and if any do not appear the region will inherit values from the grid to which it belongs However the user should be careful not to create any ambiguities in the way regions are defined in relation to the defined grid The final part of the region input s
153. e XGEN program which comes with the ITS 3 0 distribution ITS can be licensed from the Radiation Safety Information Computational Center at Oak Ridge National Laboratory 3 Research Systems Inc web site http www rsinc com idl 4 jJ A Halbleib R P Kensek G D Valdez S M Seltzer and M J Berger ITS The Integrated TIGER Series of electron photon transport codes version 3 0 IEEE Trans Nucl Sci NS 39 1025 1992 5 RSICC web site http epicws epm ornl gov rsic html LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes Chapter 2 Conventions 5 2 Conventions In this document a vertical bar is used to indicate alternate values e g X Y Z means that the value X Y or Z can be used Coordinates are given in the order X Y Z and are separated by commas or blanks For 2 D simulations only two coordinates are required and the unused direction need not appear but may be entered for visual clarity For 1 D simulations only the x coordinate is used In cylindrical geometry these stand for r 0 z and in spherical geometry they represent r 0 Optionally the user may use R in place of the symbol X and TH in place of the symbol Y when cylindrical or spherical geometry is being used and PHI in place of Z in spherical geometry The units for length are dependent upon which system of units has been specified by the user see Chapter 5 User U
154. e a continuous beam would produce a saw tooth instability Ordinarily this flag is left ON This flag applies to explicit species only and is ignored for implicit species Also this flag is ignored if the EXTENDED_PARTICLES compiler directive is defined and the particle_forces_option is set to PRIMARY Default ON 6 16 9 particle kinematics option string optional Used for the selection of multiple options in the method of advancing particle momentum The STANDARD option uses the familiar leap frog technique with the magnetic field rotation splitting the electric field push into two separate halves The IMPLICIT option does the electric and magnetic advancements simultaneously The PARAXIAL option is a simplified calculation appropriate only for paraxial beams This parameter applies to explicit species only and is ignored for implicit species Default STANDARD 6 16 10 montecarlo scattering flag flag optional Indicates which species usually electrons undergo random montecarlo scattering in the collisional plasma model If this is set to OFF the scattering is done in an averaged way and results in an energy distribution that is not as accurate In order to use this option the appropriate interaction file must be provided in the Particle Interaction section of input see Section 6 21 Particle Interaction Input page 138 The SCATTERING ON compiler directive must be defined in order for this option to be relevant
155. e are dependent upon which system of units has been specified by the user see Chapter 5 User Units page 25 but the number should be positive The user must insure that the actual transit time for the sum of the element lengths specified is not exceeded 6 10 12 frequency real optional Specifies the incoming wave frequency in Hz The amplitude is determined by either the voltage parameter or the voltage function parameter below depending on which is specified 6 10 13 impedance product function integer optional Index of a function in the Functions section which specifies a time varying multiplier applied to the impedance of the first element of the circuit model see Section 6 24 Functions Input page 144 However the resulting impedance mismatch affects only the outgoing wave not the incoming voltage pulse If impedance product function is 0 no multiplier is applied 92 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes 6 11 Volume Models Input The Volume Models section of the input file provides a number of models which can be applied over grid conformal blocks of the simulation space Entries in this section are numbered consecutively by appending an integer index to the volume keyword Most of these models are intended to be used only with dynamic field solution rather than static field solution The dielectric model is the only volume model that can be invoked while using a static field solver Th
156. e is probel label LABEL x point FIELD COMP at X YZ where LABEL is an optional user defined description and FIELD is the grid quantity E ENODE for electric field BI BNODE for magnetic field J for current density PHI for elec tric potential RHO for charge density RHON for particle number density by species QDEP for deposited surface charge density KDEP for deposited surface temperature WDEP for de posited surface energy density EDEP for deposited volumetric energy density TEMP for sur face temperature EDENS for background plasma electron density NU for momentum transfer frequency TE for plasma electron temperature in eV and SIGMA for conductivity If the quantity is a vector then the component direction COMP must be given one of XIYIZ X Y Z is the probe location and the grid quantity nearest to X Y Z is used The output units are dependent upon which system of units has been specified by the user see Chapter 5 User Units page 25 6 25 2 Integrated Probes These involve line integrals loop integrals surface fluxes and volume integrals The available types are voltage Line integral of electric field along the direction of integration The output is in units of potential see Chapter 5 User Units page 25 and is multipied by 1 in accordance with the usual definition of potential difference The from to parameters define the path of integration which may be in a negative coordinate
157. e models currently available are described below Examples are Volume Models volumel dipole Z from 2 0 0 0 12 5 to 2 0 0 2618 13 0 total_current 2 5e5 amps temporal_function 2 secondary_function 3 Spatial function O reference point O 0 O spatial flags O 0 0 volume2 conductivity Z from 2 0 0 0 1 to 2 00 5 4 sigma 10 0 temporal function O 0 0 volume3 ferrite from 0 5 0 9 0 0 to 0 9 2 0 10 0 permeability 285 0 8 0 static and infinite values resonances sine coefficient 0 0 cosine coefficient 5 21e10 decay rate 1 88e8 frequency 0 0 end When it is necessary to construct a repetitive series of similar volume models it is possible to use additional instructions after a single instance that repeats the model a number of times translated by some constant distance in succession The format is repeat N times with X Y Z where N is the number of additional volumes generated and X Y Z is the spatial translation vector to be used each time Example volumel dielectric from 0 0 0 0 0 0 Chapter 6 Input Variables 93 to 5 0 1 5 4 0 dielectric_constant 6 5 temporal function O repeat 2 times with 0 0 0 0 8 0 6 11 1 conductivity The conductivity model creates an Ohm s Law current density within the specified vol ume i e J c E for the ith component of the electric field The format is Volume Models volumel conductivity COMP from XMIN YMIN ZMIN to XMAX YMAX ZMAX
158. e size of the first cell at XMIN L1 is the length of the first interval with N1 cells etc The sum of the lengths L1 L2 must add up to XMAX XMIN in this case and the sum of the cells N1 N2 must add up to NX The cell size at the start of each successive interval matches that at the end of the preceding interval although a new dx start may be introduced at any point in the sequence of intervals A complete example of the Grid input section for a 3 D simulation with non uniform spacing could look like this Grid gridi xmin 0 0 xmax 0 5 x cells 35 dx start 0 01 x intervals length 0 2 for 20 length 0 3 for 15 end ymin 0 5 ymax 0 5 y cells 70 dy start 0 03 y intervals length 0 3 for 15 length 0 4 for 40 length 0 3 for 15 end zmin 0 0 zmax 2 1 z cells 110 dz start 0 042 z intervals length 1 3 for 50 dz start 0 01 length 0 4 for 40 length 0 4 for 20 end 54 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes 6 4 Regions Input The Regions section describes the way that the simulation space is to be broken up into zones or domains for individual processing The decomposition of the simulation space into regions and domains is described in Chapter 1 Introduction page 1 When more than one domain or region is required in a simulation the compiler directive MULTI_PROCESS must be defined since a separate process task is needed for each domain se
159. e8 eV backscatter data file tantalum tab energy loss on components tantalum fraction 1 0 end 6 9 33 1 backscatter data file string The file containing the energy and angle lookup data for all backscattering events see Section 7 2 Method 3 Backscattering File page 157 backscatter data file tantalum tab 6 9 34 method 4 Applies detailed Monte Carlo transport to any electrons which enter this medium The user supplied data file is generated by the XGEN member of the Integrated Tiger Series codes Ref 5 See Section 7 3 Method 4 Cross Section File page 159 The medium may be a tenuous gas or a solid material in which case secondaries may be produced Any reemitted secondary electrons belong to the species designated by the species parameter of the secondary emission model see Section 6 17 7 secondary page 118 For the TENUOUS option energy lost from the impacting particles can be accumulated in the individual cells of the medium for diagnostic purposes so long as the code is compiled with the ENERGY DEPOSITION compiler directive see Section 4 4 19 ENERGY_DEPOSITION page 17 The parameters associated with this model are described below Example of a medium using detailed Monte Carlo transport model Medium Models mediumi method 4 type DENSE dielectric constant 1 0 temperature 300 0 extract photons flag on extract primaries flag off extract secondaries flag off xgen data file xgen dat
160. ecies 1 discrete numbers 1 1 1 random off medium O inclusion vacuum threshold 25 55 x charge_factor 1 0 surface_factor 0 66667 thermal_energy 0 0 movie_tag 1 112 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes movie_fraction 0 2 Example of Child Langmuir emission with temporal dependence for breakdown emission child langmuir field stress from 1 0 0 0 1 0 to 14 5 3 0 Lib interval 1 species 1 random off medium O x threshold 25 x breakdown function 1x surface factor 1 0 thermal energy 0 0 movie tag O movie fraction 0 0 x Example of Child Langmuir emission with thermal breakdown emission child langmuir thermal from 0 0 0 0 0 0 to 5 0 5 0 2 5 interval 1 Species 1 random off medium 1 threshold 400 x surface factor 1 0 thermal energy 0 0 movie tag O movie fraction 0 0 x 6 17 2 1 from to real These coordinate parameters describe a volume of the simulation space over which the model is applied The test cells within this volume which can cause emission are solid surface cells conductor or dielectric or adjoining vacuum cells depending upon the method specified for the inclusion parameter below In either case particles can only be created at surface interfaces between solid cells and vacuum cells 6 17 2 2 inclusion string optional This parameter prescribes the rule that determines which cell surfaces are emitters within the from to range d
161. edium using 2 D scattering lookup tables for a foil Medium Models mediumi method 2 dielectric constant 1 0 zero forces flag on density 16 6 g cc transparency 0 5 polar_angle Z 180 azimuthal_angle X 0 primary_probability 0 99636 electron_probability 0 0399 positron_probability 0 0 primary_data_file cupri tab electron_data_file cusec tab positron_data_file cupos tab 82 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes 6 9 32 1 primary_probability real The probability in the range 0 to 1 that an incident primary electron passes through the foil This probability is usually obtained from the same calculation that produces the scattering tables 6 9 32 2 electron_probability real The probability in the range 0 to 1 that a secondary electron will escape the front or back side of the foil These electrons belong to the species designated by the species parameter of the secondary emission model see Section 6 17 7 secondary page 118 6 9 32 3 positron probability real The probability in the range 0 to 1 that a secondary positron will escape the front or back side of the foil These positrons belong to the species designated by the speciesA parameter of the secondary emission model see Section 6 17 7 secondary page 118 6 9 32 4 primary data file string The file containing the energy and angle lookup data for the primary electrons see Section 7 1 Method 2 Scattering File page 1
162. egions Input 54 rename restart flag sese 8 rename restart flag definition 32 rename restart flag Single Processor Machines I REPERTA 7 Renumber Utility ooooooooooooo o 165 renumber Renumber Utility 165 report Command File 11 report timing flag definition 51 resistance definition 00 90 resistance function Circuit Models input variables elg hala e dra iud 90 restart interval definition 32 restarts Multiple Processor Machines 8 restarts number of steps 30 restarts Regions Input 55 restarts Single Processor Machines 7 RF absorption ferrite 005 94 THEN isses cse bi ds mU 72 78 A Ganges ie ed sten eons 148 150 RHON 51 122 eet de hr thea wae wind Ss 148 150 rotation injection definition 118 rotation plasma definition 128 Running DSP wv oe le edit 7 S sample file make pc Compiling on MS Windows ion hah ute osa Re os a LER RS RR P E 14 sample file makedef Compiling on Unix and MacOS X sine see dott rope cd ees 13 sample file Method 2 Scattering File 157 sample file Method 3 Backscattering File 157 sample file Method 4 Cross Section File 159 sample file pgroup Workstation Network 8 sample file scr
163. eld movie interval ns Interval in ns between field movie frames field movie interval cm Interval in units of 1 cm c where c is the velocity of light between field movie frames Default 1 e 9 no dumps 6 2 10 26 particle movie components strings Specifies the particle components to be output to the particle movie dumps These can be QIXIYIZ VXIVYIVZ charge position and velocity An example is particle movie components x y z which is the default 46 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes 6 2 10 27 particle movie interval integer Options for this parameter are particle movie interval Number of timesteps between particle movie frames particle movie interval time Interval in user units between particle movie frames particle movie interval ns Interval in ns between particle movie frames particle movie interval cm Interval in units of 1 cm c where c is the velocity of light between particle movie frames Default 1 e 9 no dumps 6 2 10 28 photon output format string Specifies the type of output format to be used in the photon output data dumps This can have the values ASCII or BINARY The ASCII format is useful for reading printed output directly or for plotting with a graphical output utility such as gnuplot The BINARY format is intended for more compact files to be post processed by an appropriate utility An example is photon_output_format ASCII Default BINARY
164. element 6 10 4 termination string optional Specifies one of several types of boundary condition at the initial end of the transmission line that is the end away from the simulation grid Any of these can also be applied to a network junction TERMINATION type The termination types available are MATCHED The default condition that is a matched termination VOLTAGE_APPLICATION A voltage is to be applied from an infinite source OPEN An open ended circuit as if the line is truncated with infinite impedance SHORT A short circuit or zero impedance condition CHARGED An open circuit termination with the addition that the entire length of the first transmission line segment is pre charged to the value of the voltage parameter see below LCR An LCR circuit which is characterized by a lumped capacitance inductance and resistance all in series with an open circuit termination The capacitor is initially charged with a voltage obtained from the voltage parameter or by evaluating the voltage function at t 0 LINER Uses the imploding liner model the parameters of which are contained in the Liner Models section of input see Section 6 12 Liner Models Input page 97 This option must be followed by an integer index identifying the liner model Note that the formats for these terminations are slightly different for transmission lines and networks in the above examples For transmission lines the termination keyword
165. em cartesian cylindrical or spherical has been defined for the simulation Other shapes CONE PARABOLOID PARALLELEPIPED SPHERE TORUS are in dependent of the geometry while two of the shapes TRILATERAL and QUADRILATERAL describe two dimensional polygons which are swept through the third dimension to make a complete solid figure The FUNCTION designation depends completely on the defined coor dinate system One option SOLID is not a shape itself but is used to set conductor medium and potential flags for the entire simulation grid If used it should be the first object since otherwise it will override all previously defined objects It is usually followed by objects which hollow out a cavity by virtue of the conductor off feature When it is necessary to construct a series of similar shapes it is possible to use additional instructions after an object to repeat the object a number of times translated by some constant distance in succession The format is repeat N times with X Y Z where N is the number of additional objects generated and X Y Z is the spatial translation vector to be used each time The object types SOLID and FUNCTION can not be repeated and the repetition construct can not appear within an intersection construct Example object4 BLOCK conductor on potential 0 from 2 0 0 0 0 0 to 5 00 0 1 5 repeat 5 times with 0 0 0 0 5 0 The shapes and their associated parameters are described below
166. emittance of beam at Z 0 7 particle emittance species 1 direction Z at 0 0 0 0 0 7 probe15 effective current of beam at Z 0 7 to 0 9 particle ieff species 1 direction Z radius 1 2 from 0 0 0 0 0 7 to 0 0 0 0 0 9 probei6 half current radius of beam at Z 0 7 to 0 9 particle rhalf species 1 direction Z radius 1 2 from 0 0 0 0 0 0 7 to 0 0 0 0 0 9 Chapter 6 Input Variables 153 In addition multiple species can be lumped together in the same measurement simply by listing them in sequence as follows particle TYPE species SP1 SP2 direction DIR at XYZ Example probei7 dq dt for species 1 2 4 and 7 together particle dqdt species 12 4 7 direction Z at 0 0 0 0 1 5 6 25 4 Particle Slice Probes Particle slice probes compute moments of the particle distribution in a collection of injected particles These slices are produced by the particle injection model see Section 6 17 6 injection page 115 or the particle fileread model see Section 6 17 16 fileread page 130 if the slice times parameter is used to specify a list of times see Section 6 17 1 15 slice times page 111 The format is slice NS TYPE species SP direction DIR where NS is the slice index 1 for the first slice time etc TYPE is one of the types from the table given for Particle Measurement Probes see Section 6 25 3 Particle Measurement Probes page 150 SP is the species index see Section 6 16 Particle Species Input
167. emporal Parameters liess lesse 30 TEMPORAL FILTER compiler directives 22 TEMPORAL FILTER temporal filtering parameter 36 temporal filtering parameter 22 temporal filtering parameter definition 36 temporal function excitation definition 129 temporal function external field definition ADI ANG Ban BALENG Ross Maha NB et gaged 103 temporal function fileread definition 131 temporal function injection definition 116 temporal function photoionization definition MAIGE wa ies baya ed ge eaten baie dg A td hah 126 temporal_function definition 68 temporal_function potentials 67 temporal momentum function definition 117 TENUOUS conductivity medium 76 TENUOUS dump_ohmic_quantities_flag 42 TENUOUS ENERGY_DEPOSITION 17 TENUOUS gas density 76 TENUOUS reference point medium 76 TENUOUS spatial_flags medium 76 TENUOUS spatial function medium 76 TENUOUS species medium 76 termination definition 89 termination segments 05 87 termination voltage_function 90 thermal energy definition 111 thermal ion fraction definition 121 thickness definiti0O oooooooo o 80 threshold collapse definition 13
168. endently using the field_dump_times particle_dump_times extraction_dump_times and diagnostic_dump_times keywords They also have the same alternate forms as dump_ times above Any use of them will add to the list of generically specified times for those dumps 6 2 10 19 dump_velocities_flag flag If dump_velocities_flag is ON output fluid mean velocities to the vector fields dump file for each species The SCATTERING_ON compiler directive must be invoked for these quantities to be available otherwise no values are written see Section 4 4 48 SCATTERING_ ON page 21 Default OFF 6 2 10 20 extract photons flag flag If extract photons flag is ON output photons produced by the Monte Carlo transport model to a binary file A method 4 medium model must be active for this to happen The format for this data is defined in the section under File Formats see Section 7 10 Primary Output Data File page 162 The data is broken up onto separate files depending on the extraction dump interval or its related control parameters Default OFF 6 2 10 21 extract primaries flag flag If extract primaries flag is ON output primaries going into the Monte Carlo trans port model to a binary file A method 4 medium model must be active for this to happen The format for this data is defined in the section under File Formats see Section 7 10 Primary Output Data File page 162 The data is broken up onto separate files depending
169. ent Probes 150 Particle Measurement Probes sample input 152 Particle Measurement Probes Particle Slice ProbeS oi stude pL Nt Se RS 153 Particle Measurement Probes types of 151 Particle Slice Probes o ooooooooo o 153 Particle Slice Probes slice_times 111 PARTICLE COLLAPSE compiler directives 21 PARTICLE COLLAPSE Particle Collapse Input 134 particle cyclotron check definition 50 particle data file definition 131 particle dump interval definition Al particle_dump_steps definition 43 particle_dump_times definition 44 particle_forces_option definition 106 particle_kinematics_option definition 107 particle_motion_check definition 50 particle motion flag definition 106 particle movie components definition 45 particle movie components sample input 45 particle movie interval definition 46 particles Command File 11 PBFA II lithium ion source emission field limited a 113 pdv term flag definition 39 perfectly matched layer PML Freespace Boundaries llle 69 perfectly matched layer PML FREESPACE_PML GANG ar SBI TIBA NA HL ELE BaP gD CR ue ERE 18 Performance Probes o oooooooomoooo 155 Periodic BoundarieS o ooocooooooooooo 69 periodic boundaries sample i
170. ential 0 from 15 0 0 0 10 0 to 5 6 0 0 11 33 to 5 6 0 0 14 33 to 15 0 0 0 14 33 sweep_direction Y Chapter 6 Input Variables 61 6 5 10 SOLID The SOLID option is not a shape per se Its purpose is to set conductor medium and potential flags for the entire simulation grid One possibility is to set the entire grid to con ducting thereby avoiding the need to define conducting objects to set conducting boundary conditions Vacuum spaces can then be carved out using conductor off flags Jf SOLID is used it should be the first object since otherwise it will overwrite all previously defined flags Example objecti SOLID set all cells to conductors conductor on medium O potential 0 6 5 11 SPHERE Defines a sphere with the center and radius parameters Coordinate system indepen dent shape Example object2 SPHERE cathode electrode conductor on medium O potential 0 center 0 0 1 0 2 0 radius 0 5 6 5 12 TORUS Defines a torus with the center major_radius and minor_radius parameters The torus s orientation is given by the polar_angle and azimuthal_angle parameters whose format is polar anglelazimuthal angle AXIS ANGLE where AXIS can be X Y Z and the ANGLE is in degrees This orientation is performed in cartesian coordinates even if the simulation coordinates are non cartesian The two axes must not be the same Optionally a toroidal section can be constructed by the presence of two parameters sta
171. er model dynamically changes the permeability from its initial value The optional parameter temporal_function specifies an integer N which is the index of a function which multiplies the permeability see Section 6 24 Functions Input page 144 When using this model with the ADI field solver see Section 4 4 30 IMPLICIT_FIELDS page 19 the compiler directive USE PERMEABILITY must be defined See Section 4 4 63 USE PERMEABILITY page 23 A more general way to specify paramagnetic materials is through a medium model associated with structural objects see Section 6 5 Objects Input page 56 Chapter 6 Input Variables 97 6 12 Liner Models Input The Liner Models section of the input file specifies parameters for a simple imploding liner model Entries in this section are numbered consecutively by appending an integer index to the liner keyword This integer may be used in the paramagnetic model to obtain a dynamically changing magnetic permeability over a specified volume see Section 6 11 6 paramagnetic page 96 This allows a self consistent treatment of the changing induc tance of the liner region The user must ensure that the liner dimensions are consistent with the actual geometry The format is Liner Models lineri mass M length L outer_radius RO inner_radius RI final_radius RF where M is the mass of the liner L is the length of the liner RO is the outer radius of the can containing t
172. eraction Input 138 Startup Messages 0 aa 10 startup time definition 91 Static Field Algorithm 04 38 static field solution Volume Models Input 92 STATIC FIELDS compiler directives 22 STATIC FIELDS acceleration parameter 38 STATIC FIELDS CHARGE DENSITY 15 STATIC FIELDS DIRECT IMPLICIT 16 STATIC FIELDS field initializatino flag 35 STATIC FIELDS implicit subcycles 3T STATIC FIELDS MAGNETOSTATIC 20 STATIC FIELDS Objects Input 56 STATIC FIELDS plasma 127 STATIC FIELDS potential iterations 38 STATIC FIELDS potential tolerance 38 STATIC FIELDS Potentials Input 71 STATIC_FIELDS scalar_movie_components 46 STATIC FIELDS USE_OHMIC_TERMS 23 STATIC FIELDS USE PERMEABILITY 23 STATIC FIELDS FFT2D compiler directives 22 stimulated cross section definition 121 stimulated ion fraction definition 121 stimulating species definition 115 STIMULUS DEPOSITION compiler directives 22 STIMULUS DEPOSITION emission stimulated KEEP GMA ieee ERG Ges ead ba oases es 114 STIMULUS DEPOSITION stimulating species gested Pea ead oisi a Fur Ped d 115 STIMULUS SPECIES compiler directives 22 STIMULUS SPECIES STIMULUS DEPOSITION 22 stop Command File
173. ergence flag flag 50 6 2 11 6 print grid Hag Hag su cerae saka 50 6 2 11 7 print region flag flag 50 6 2 11 8 dump timing flag flag 50 6 2 11 9 report timing flag flag 51 6 3 Grid Inputs i iier pente ER RE TUER Ee ed 52 6 4 Regions Input 54 6 5 Objects Input ceti eene nee eee ha band nh seks beh 56 Gio BLOCK uei eL di e pe En 57 625 2 GONE mu utenti weed an hanap 58 vi LSP User s Manual and Reference 0 5 9 CYLINDER suena tei a bak ack Su iy ee 58 6 54 POM sever a S ieee a Ae SIS 58 6 5 5 EUNCTION main 59 6 5 6 PARABOLOID nnR RII 59 6 5 7 PARALLELEPIPED 0 60 6 5 8 TRILATERAL eR 60 6 5 9 QUADRILATERAL nn eee 60 6 5 10 SOLID zo Reb pei 61 6 5 11 SPHERE o oteeeerbenex tr PER rans 61 6 5 12 TORUS ceri Saale a ERES 61 60 13 WIRE ennt deen 224 D eee deer ded 62 6 6 Boundaries Input 63 6 6 1 Outlet Boundaries eed pA KAG ta dad KA 63 6 6 1 1 from to real 45 pees tee Xy euam 65 6 6 1 2 phase velocity real optional 66 6 6 1 3 no_absorption flag optional 66 6 6 1 4 drive model string 66 6 6 1 5 potentials real is ence m ee 66 6 6 1 6 geometry string prior n 67 6 6 1 7 modes integer oooooooomomoo 67 6 5 1 8 3uner radius real 2 polyp ERE 67 6 6 1 9 outer radius real Mus 67 6 6 1 10 circuit
174. ering parameter definition inicie e RE 35 electron data file definition 82 electron density definition 77 electron_probability definition 82 electron_species desorption definition 121 electron species definition 109 electron species photoionization 124 electrostatic field solver acceleration parameter dius rni ru emerit Ris pd Sih ac ied 38 electrostatic field solver CHARGE DENSITY 15 electrostatic field solver Circuit Models Input 85 electrostatic field solver Convergence Probes 154 electrostatic field solver Objects Input 56 electrostatic field solver plasma 127 electrostatic field solver potential iterations ERES 38 electrostatic field solver potential tolerance Gn KG PAA erts PST REN RUIT 38 electrostatic field solver Potentials Input 71 electrostatic field solver STATIC FIELDS 22 electrostatic field solver STATIC_FIELDS_FFT2D A IR ETE E e 22 elements definition 000 87 emission child langmuir definition 111 emission field limited definition 113 emission field limited sample input 113 emission source limited definition 114 emission source limited sample input 114 Chapter 10 General Index emission stimulated definition 114 emission stimulated sample input 114 emission stimulated
175. erride balance flag 33 parallel processing region balance flag 33 PARALLELEPIPED definition 60 PARALLELEPIPED sample input 60 paramagnetic definition 96 paramagnetic materials method O 79 paramagnetic materials USE PERMEABILITY 23 paramagnetic Liner Models Input 97 parameter types rirci o l l 5 Particle Collapse sample input 134 Particle Collapse Input 134 Parti Parti Parti Parti Parti Parti Parti Parti Parti Parti Parti Parti Parti Parti Parti Parti Parti Parti Parti Parti cle Collision Algorithm 38 cle Creation Input 108 cle Creation Parameters 109 cle Diagnostics sample input 141 cle Diagnostics Input 140 cle Extraction sample input 137 cle Extraction Input 137 cle Extraction Input Fileread Particle File crest set Siaiag Heed Dania NETS 161 cle Interaction sample input 138 cle Interaction Data File 161 cle Interaction Input 138 cle Interaction Input dump montecarlo diagnostics flag 41 cle Interaction Input ionization 122 cle Interaction Input montecarlo scattering flag 107 cle Interaction Input Particle Interaction Data Files 00 pah NAA AD nad 161 cle Migr
176. erride balance flag is ON any load balancing information on the restart file is ignored and the simulation is continued in the domain configuration specified on the input file If the load balance flag is left ON however load balancing will continue at the next opportunity Default OFF 6 2 3 7 load timing interval integer Information on the CPU time taken for the field solution and the particle algorithm are accumulated over this interval prior to the load balance evaluation which depends on these data Default 1 6 2 4 Field Solution and Modification 34 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes 6 2 4 1 applied_current real The value for the applied_current parameter is used to initialize the Y or Theta component of magnetic fields in the simulation space The primary use of this parame ter is in conjunction with the hysteresis volume model to start the simulation with B and H fields at some values on the lower end of the hysteresis curve see Section 6 11 5 hysteresis page 95 Default 0 0 6 2 4 2 background_electron_conductivity real This parameter is used in the quasi neutral field solution to set the value of the to tal background conductivity which is applied to electron currents see Section 4 4 47 QUASINEUTRAL_FIELDS page 21 Default 1 e13 in inverse seconds 6 2 4 3 background plasma density real This parameter is used in the quasi neutral field solution to set the
177. ers control the orientation and the from to coordinates merely indicate the space in which the model is located These are not necessarily the two end points of the slope The actual orientation is determined by the normal parameters which are understood to give the signed direction normal to the conducting surface The user does not ordinarily place any other structural objects explicitly within the coordinate boundaries indicated by the subgrid model see Section 6 5 Objects Input page 56 Chapter 6 Input Variables 99 6 14 Substrate Models Input The Substrate Models section of the input file provides a means of emitting ion species which exist as absorbed material in a specially prepared metal plate Entries in this section are numbered consecutively by appending an integer index to the substrate keyword The only model currently available is described below Note that the number of materials is three The first material is the metallic plate the second is the ceramic backing the third is an aluminum oxide sleeve The production of ions from the substrate is stimulated by energy deposition on the surface Therefore the substrate model must be imbedded in a structural surface of conductor material in order to function correctly This model may not be available in all releases of the LSP code Example Particle Species species2 Hydrogen charge 0 mass 1837 0 Substrate Models Hydrogen source materials Metal Ceramic Alu
178. escribed above The possible values are either SOLID or VACUUM such that only cells of those types within the specified coordinates become candidates for emis sion The vacuum option is not available for the stimulated model see Section 6 17 5 emission stimulated page 114 Default SOLID Chapter 6 Input Variables 113 6 17 2 3 threshold real For child langmuir field stress the threshold is the value of electric field stress at which breakdown occurs that is when emission begins For child langmuir thermal the threshold is the surface temperature in kelvins at which emission is initiated For the latter case if a non zero value is specified the KELVIN_DEPOSITION compiler directive must be defined see Section 4 4 33 KELVIN_DEPOSITION page 19 The surface temperature is computed from the energy deposited by electrons or positrons and the specific heat of the surface material Note A solid medium model is required in order to generate the necessary surface temperature data see Section 6 9 Medium Models Input page 73 6 17 2 4 breakdown function integer optional A time dependent function which defines the multiplier applied to the emitted charge as a means of delaying the onset of space charge limited emission after surface breakdown has been achieved Use of this option requires that the compiler directive DELAY BREAKDOWN be defined see Section 4 4 14 DELAY BREAKDOWN page 16 6 17 2 5 surface factor real
179. ess of any time limits in the input file This may also be useful for checking the simulation setup before submitting a batch run for example 3 2 Multiple Processor Machines The multiple processor version of LSP uses the MPI message passing library http www unix mcs anl gov mpi This version can make use of decomposition of 8 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes the simulation space into separate domains in order to distribute the work load among multiple processes and thereby achieve faster running times The multiple processor version of LSP produces a separate restart file for each region named restarti dat restart2 dat All of these files must be present for the restart to work correctly If the rename_restart_flag is ON see Section 6 2 2 3 rename_ restart_flag page 32 then the most recent restart files may have the alt extension this can be determined by looking at the file dates In this case the files with the dat extension can be moved out of the current run directory before restarting The code will then attempt a restart from the alt files If this restart fails the dat files can be used as a backup by restoring them to the run directory The most common reason for restart failure is a corrupted or incomplete restart file due to time limit termination while the file was being written A better way to restart a simulation from the alt file
180. esses 44 diagnostics method 4 00005 83 diagnostics NUMBER_DENSITIES 21 diagnostics Particle Diagnostics Input 140 diagnostics Particle Targets Input 142 diagnostics Probes Input 148 diagnostics slice times 111 dielectric definition 93 dielectric material sample input 79 dielectric materials 34 73 79 93 172 LSP User s Manual and Reference dielectric materials dielectric_constant 73 dielectric materials USE PERMITTIVITY 23 dielectric constant definition 73 dielectric constant method 0 79 dielectric_constant segments 87 dielectric kill flag definition 34 diffusion length definition 75 dipole definition 94 dipole sample input 94 DIRECT IMPLICIT compiler directives 16 DIRECT IMPLICIT electric force filtering paramter 35 DIRECT IMPLICIT FRICTIONAL EFFECTS 18 DIRECT IMPLICIT FULL SUSCEPTIBILITY 19 DIRECT IMPLICIT IMPLICIT FIELDS 19 DIRECT IMPLICIT implicit iterations 3T DIRECT IMPLICIT implicit species flag 106 DIRECT IMPLICIT implicit subcycles 37 DIRECT_IMPLICIT magnetic force filtering parameter 35 DIRECT IMPLICIT Particle Species Input 105 Dirichlet b
181. ethod 3 definition 82 Method 3 Backscattering File 157 Method 3 Backscattering File sample file 157 Method 3 Backscattering File backscatter 119 Method 3 Backscattering File backscatter data file 83 Method 3 Backscattering File method 3 82 178 LSP User s Manual and Reference method 3 backscatter 119 method 3 desorption esses 119 method 3 from to backscatter 119 method 3 KELVIN_DEPOSITION 19 method 3 Method 3 Backscattering File 157 method 3 Particle Creation Input 108 method 3 polar_angle 0 77 method 3 temperature sese 74 method 4 definition oooooooooooo oo 83 Method 4 Cross Section File 159 Method 4 Cross Section File sample file 159 Method 4 Cross Section File method 4 83 Method 4 Cross Section File xgen_data_file 84 method 4 desorption eese 119 method 4 dump ohmic quantities flag 42 method 4 ENERGY_DEPOSITION 17 method 4 extract photons flag 44 method 4 extract photons flag medium 77 method 4 extract primaries flag 44 method 4 extract primaries flag medium uto v etu ect A pl t OLI ente 77 method 4 extract_secondaries_flag 45 method 4 extract_secondaries_flag medium og enne Waal ei nG NANG eti bia dad a wok Gs 77 me
182. f current radius measurement Another option includes designation of a slice with some thickness by use of the from to parameters This is useful when the particles are not actually moving fast enough through the measurement plane to obtain good statistics However in this case the dqdt measurement type is not meaningful Note that in most cases the two pairs of coordinates not matching the DIR parameter are treated as a single reference point The exceptions are the two integrated measurements ieff and rhalf which firstly are confined to having the direction Z and secondly must have spatial extent in both the axial and radial directions 152 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes The latter may either be defined through an additional parameter radius or by default in the to parameter Note that the windowing parameters may still be used The format is particle TYPE species SP direction DIR radius RAD from X Y Z to XYZ x window 0 0 y window 0 0 z window 0 0 Examples probe10 dq dt through a plane at Z 0 7 particle dqdt species 1 direction Z at 0 0 0 0 0 7 probeii dq dt at Z 0 7 for particles traveling in the direction particle dqdt species 1 direction Z at 0 0 0 0 0 7 probei2 average y position at Z 0 7 particle ybar species 1 direction Z at 0 0 0 0 0 7 probei3 rms radius of beam at Z 0 7 particle radrms species 1 direction Z at 0 0 0 0 0 7 probei4
183. fies the simulation coordinates over which freespace boundary conditions are im posed on fields and particles The from to parameters give the lower and upper limits of the boundary coordinates Actually the coordinates should correspond exactly to the simulation grid coordinate limits except where the freespace model is not meant to be ap plied for example where there is a ground plane or some other boundary model There are three models available for freespace simulation the one way wave absorbing model which is only reliable for point sources the perfectly matched layer uniaxial version and the con volutional version of the PML which is the most general and reliable of the three For the first model the outer boundary must be left open whereas for the other two the parts of the outer boundary on which freespace modelling is applied must be set as a conducting boundary as if it were a cavity simulation In both PML models the parts of the simulation grid covered by the absorbing layers are within the outer boundary and these parts should be set up by the user to be clear of any scattering objects In general using a larger value for number of cells will result in better absorption at the cost of memory for the extra cells required T he grid spacing normal to the boundaries should be uniform in these layers Use of either PML model requires that the compiler directive FREESPACE PML be defined see Section 4 4 27 FREESPACE_PML page 18
184. fraction 0 0 6 17 10 1 from to real For the ionization model these coordinate parameters describe a volume of the simu lation space over which the model is applied Chapter 6 Input Variables 123 6 17 10 2 species integer Integer identifying the species to be ionized usually neutral 6 17 10 3 ionization factors real optional The probability of ionization by a particle is calculated every ionization interval timesteps see Section 6 2 7 1 ionization interval page 38 Ionization factors multiply the charge of simulation particles produced in an ionization event To maintain the correct physical charge the ionization probability is multiplied by the inverse of these factors A value of 1 gives simulation particle production at the same rate relative to the number of impacting particles as physical particles Values 1 give more simulation particles with less charge which may be desirable for better statistics The number of entries should equal the number of species in the calculation and are listed in the order that the species appear in the Particle Species input section see Section 6 16 Particle Species Input page 104 The code cannot produce more than one ion per event so there is a lower limit on the ionization factor below which the production rate is constant A value of 0 means that the species corresponding to this entry produces no ionization 6 17 10 4 production rates real optional The pr
185. ger Series codes 3 ITS Integrated Tiger Series codes method medium e te AN cO EI EA 73 ITS Integrated Tiger Series codes method 2 81 ITS Integrated Tiger Series codes method 3 82 ITS Integrated Tiger Series codes method 4 83 R E Clark and T P Hughes ITS Integrated Tiger Series codes xgen_data_file o oooo o oo 84 ITS codes USE XSEC o ooooooooooooo 24 J AT AA EE E r 148 junctions definition 0000 88 J rgens cst e T ee See el aed 98 Kapton gc very eases ERU RENE 78 KDED or enu are eee hee ORE PAN RS Quiere 148 KELVIN DEPOSITION compiler directives 19 KELVIN DEPOSITION dump surface depositions flag 43 KELVIN DEPOSITION emission stimulated 114 KELVIN DEPOSITION polar angle 77 KELVIN_DEPOSITION threshold emission 113 kinetic energy measurement Global Particle Piobesi ereis E aes S 153 kinetic energy measurement Particle Diagnostics Aput ci usce E sale toa ae Pe PER Fe EGG 140 kinetic energy measurement Particle Measurement Probes Kaba as ena NES 151 kinetic_migration_interval definition 39 O Ie ERA eb RAD D 75 78 L laser source sample input 64 laser source Outlet Boundaries 64 LCR circuit capacitance 90 LCR circuit frequency circuit 91 LCR circuit inductance 90 LCR circuit resistance
186. get Six different types of divergence measurments are included the mean angle from the normal for each transverse component separately plus the total angle and the divergence about the mean for each transverse component and its total Requests for this data are numbered consecutively by appending an integer index to the target keyword The data for these measurements are written at intervals given by the diagnostic dump interval parameter see Section 6 2 10 7 dump interval page 41 The format is targetN TYPE species SP normal DIR x divisions NX y divisions NY z divisions NZ from XMIN YMIN ZMIN to XMAX YMAX ZMAX time TMIN to TMAX minimum energy EMIN maximum energy EMAX where N is 1 2 TYPE is the target type either SQUARE or RADIAL SP is the species index see Section 6 16 Particle Species Input page 104 DIR is the signed or unsigned direction normal to the plane X X XlY Yl YIZI Z1 Z NX NY NZ are the number of divisions bins in each direction zero in the direction specified by DIR and XMIN YMIN ZMIN XMAX YMAX ZMAX are opposite corners of the 2 D target region The target type SQUARE refers to the fact that the target is a 2 D rectangular region regardless of whether the simulation grid is cartesian or cylindrical and RADIAL means that the target is defined in r theta coordinates and is available only whe
187. gy tail of the scattered distribution is calculated using the formulation due to Vesey Ref 12 The format of the backscattering data file is as follows The head of the file can have any number of comment lines beginning with The first line not beginning with is the number of incident energies in the table 158 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes Number of incident energies 7 This is followed by one comment line and the list of incident energies in units of eV Incident energies eV 500 1000 2000 Next is one comment line followed by the number of incident angles in the table then one comment line and the list of incident angles in radians Number of incident angles 19 Incident angles rad 0 0 087266462599716474 0 17453292519943295 0 26179938779914941 This ends the header section of the table Next follows the lookup information for each incident energy angle pair in the sequence 19 0 j 1 2 EP97 j 1 2 etc For each pair E 07 the table starts with any number of comment lines The first non comment is the total yield fraction Y which is the number of backscattered electrons produced per incident electron Backscattered electrons for styrene Generated using inverti pl styrene00 00 dist styrene00 00 lookup 20 20 Total yield fraction 0 0244459144416445 This is followed by one comment line and the relative yield from the extrapolate
188. he liner RI is the initial inner radius of the liner and RF is the final radius of the liner after implosion Note that RF is smaller than RI causing the impedance to increase as the liner implodes 98 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes 6 13 Subgrid Models Input The Subgrid Models section of the input file provides a means of modeling structure electromagnetically on scales which are smaller than the gridding provides for example a smooth non conformal surface which cannot be accomplished with ordinary stair stepping techniques This is an idea taken from Jurgens et al Ref 8 where it was used in scattering simulations on spherical bodies in a 3 D cartesian mesh At present the only use of this technique is for a flat surface sloped in any two coordinate directions but not all three This model although it is useful for eliminating undesirable wave distortion which may result from a stair stepped model is not suitable for particle charge conservation and should only be used in areas of the simulation where particles do not occur Also it has not yet been implemented for static fields solutions or implicit fields solutions When using this model the compiler directive USE SUBCELLS must be defined See Section 4 4 66 USE SUBCELLS page 23 Example Subgrid Models subgridi SLOPE pierce electrode normalO Z normali X from 8 25 0 13 0 to 17 25 0 17 0 where the two normal paramet
189. he load balance between processes every balance_ interval intervals see Section 6 2 3 1 balance_interval page 32 The rebalance pro cedure if needed is performed only within regions rather than between regions see Sec tion 6 2 3 4 region_balance_flag page 33 Default ON 6 2 3 3 number of processes integer Number of processes to be used for the simulation On a multiple processor computer each process is typically started on a different processor if available The number must be equal to the total number of domains into which the simulation space has been divided 6 2 3 4 region balance flag flag If region balance flag is ON perform load balancing across regions as well as within regions T his enables processes to migrate between regions The 1oad balance flag must also be ON for this option Default OFF 6 2 3 5 initial balance flag flag If initial balance flag is ON perform load balancing shortly after run initialization either at t 0 or when restarting a simulation This is useful in the latter case when changing the number of processes to be used or when the override balance flag is set to ON that is whenever the simulation may not be in a balanced state The 1oad balance flag must also be ON for this option Default OFF 6 2 3 6 override balance flag flag The override balance flag only effects restart runs from previously generated restart dumps in which load balancing has occurred If ov
190. he method by which the fields effect particle forces The option AVERAGED will cause the spatially averaged fields at grid node positions to be used The option PRIMARY or STAGGERED will use the fields directly calculated from the E M solution on the particles Additionally the particle forces option can be set to NONE in which case the particle positions will be advanced but not their momenta The AVERAGED option is good for momentum conservation in that there are no self forces on the particles The PRIMARY option produces an energy conserving push that is not susceptible to the so called Debye length numerical instability The simulation is numerically stable even for grid size larger than the plasma skin depth although resolution of this parameter is desirable The magnetic field in this case is still provided by the averaged values as for the AVERAGED option The PRIMARY option is recommended and is the default when the EXTENDED PARTICLES Chapter 6 Input Variables 107 compiler directive has been defined see Section 4 4 21 EXTENDED_PARTICLES page 17 This choice is required for species that have been designated for implicit advancement Default AVERAGED for explicit species PRIMARY for implicit species or when EXTENDED_ PARTICLES is defined 6 16 8 1 transverse weighting flag flag optional Used to modify the spatial weighting scheme for particle forces due to fields This can be set to OFF under simulation conditions wher
191. he plane passes through the at coordinate and is normal to the DIR parameter The units for time are dependent upon which system of units has been specified by the user see Chapter 5 User Units page 25 Example Particle Extraction extractl species 1 direction Z maximum_number 10000 start_time 10 0 stop_time 11 0 at 0 0 0 0 6 5 The maximum_number of particles extracted is only approximate as the code will continue the extraction process for that timestep once the number is reached The data generated by the extractN request are written to a binary file named extN dat Each record of extN dat gives the following data for a particle time q x y z px py pz temperature where the temperature is added only for fluid species see Section 6 16 4 fluid species flag page 106 138 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes 6 21 Particle Interaction Input When the SCATTERING_ON compiler directive is defined collisions between the species de fined in the Particle Species section of the input file can be modeled see Section 4 4 48 SCATTERING_ON page 21 Coulomb collisions between charged particles are treated using internally computed Spitzer collision rates Neutral neutral collisions are treated using a hard sphere collision rate For collisions between neutrals and charged particles the user must specify the momentum transfer collision frequency ionization cross section if applica
192. he size of the particle cloud ef fectively covers two grid cells in each coordinate dimension instead of the usual one cell The resulting self force of a particle is reduced by the corresponding reduction in particle density factor of 2 in 1 D 4 in 2 D and 8 in 3 D The key benefit of this treatment is that numerical collisionality is greatly reduced while maintaining good energy conservation Note that with the explicit particle push option good energy conservation is possible only if the plasma skin depth is adequately resolved Warning this compiler option may not work with complete fidelity under all circum stances The case that should be avoided is when all of the following are used simultaneously 1 3 dimensions 2 multiple regions 3 explicit field solution and 4 particle forces option set to PRIMARY for any of the particle species defined in the simulation 4 4 22 EXTERNAL BFIELDS Enables external magnetic fields to be defined by the user either by functional pre scription or from data files and applied to particle forces In addition the definition must be equal to the number of instances of those types of applications if more than one is re quired Note that this directive is not required for simple constant values of applied field see Section 6 15 External Fields Input page 100 18 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes 4 4 23 EXTERNAL_EFIELDS Enables external electric fields
193. hines Running LSP 7 MULTI_PROCESS compiler directives 20 MULTI PROCESS Regions Input 54 MULTI PROCESS Running LSP 7 Multiple Processor Machines 7 multiple processor machines ASCIQ 9 multiple processor machines balance interval PLE DRIED EE On AM ti 32 multiple processor machines number of processes 33 MUTABLE SPECIES compiler directives 20 MUTABLE SPECIES ionization 122 MUTABLE SPECIES IONIZATION ON 19 N NEON fore das RN Nan a Her ERR du eds 75 78 neutral species charge 004 105 neutral neutral collisions Particle Interaction PUT o cadets Mie ite eee eee aen 138 no absorption definition 66 NO_PARTICLES compiler directives 21 non uniform grid 0 eee eee eee 52 normal definitioL o oooooooo o 109 INU ec fae cete dte ds VC eS 148 Chapter 10 General Index NUMBER DENSITIES 22 oe si Eeee E pa 42 NUMBER_DENSITIES compiler directives 21 NUMBER_DENSITIES higherstate 123 NUMBER_DENSITIES MAX_SPECIES 20 NUMBER_DENSITIES scalar_movie_components grabs oye PS ism qua ONSE 46 number of domains Regions Input 54 number_of_processes definition 33 number of processes DEC Cluster 8 number of processes Workstation Network 8 num
194. ich is contained in the Functions section of input see Section 6 24 Functions Input page 144 determines the time dependence of the magnitude of the field outlet from 0 0 0 0 0 0 to 0 0 0 0 0 0 phase velocity 1 drive model ANALYTIC TEM geometry flat modes 0 0 1 temporal function 1 Example of a boundary with a rectangular opening through which a TM transverse magnetic wave is launched outlet from 9 0 0 0 0 0 to 12 0 4 0 0 0 phase velocity 1 6 drive model WAVEGUIDE TM geometry RECTANGULAR modes 0 1 0 temporal function 1 frequency 9 e9 Cycles sec Example of a boundary with a two dimensional opening through which an analytic laser driven focused wave is launched outlet Chapter 6 Input Variables 65 from 2 0e 3 2 to 2 0e 3 2 phase velocity 1 drive model LASER reference point 0 0 0 0 5 4e 3 focal spot position components 1 1 0 phases O 1 5708 0 polarization control radians temporal function 1 analytic function 2 0e 3 0e 3 0 0 e 0 0 Functions functionl temporal ramp type O data pairs 0 0 0 0 1 e 5 1 e8 end function2 analytic laser function type 19 coefficients 4 0e 4 wavelength 2 0e 4 spot size radius The resulting wave has a gaussian shape which is symmetric about the axis of propa gation The user should insure that the outlet opening is large enough to accomodate this wave that is the electric field strength should be near zero at the outer
195. iltering_parameter real Applies temporal smoothing of the error currents in the direct implicit method The range of this parameter is 0 to 1 Higher values give more smoothing and are generally recommended for higher density plasmas Default 0 0 no smoothing 6 2 5 2 implicit_acceleration_parameter real Initial acceleration factor for the ADI field solution The code will adjust this parameter if necessary to help convergence Default 0 0 6 2 5 3 implicit iterations integer Maximum number of iterations to be used in the ADI method of advancing fields Requires either the IMPLICIT FIELDS or the DIRECT IMPLICIT compiler directive The ADI field solver is used with the direct implicit particle push Ref 2 See Section 4 4 16 DIRECT IMPLICIT page 16 Fewer iterations will be used if convergence is reached A warning message is printed if this limit is reached without convergence Also a printout of the number of iterations used can be obtained using the print convergence flag or the iteration count can be put onto the time history file by requesting a convergence iterations probe see Section 6 25 8 Convergence Probes page 154 Iteration numbers greater than 10 usually indicate a problem with convergence In this case reducing the simulation timestep is recommended 6 2 5 4 implicit omega min factor real An adjustment parameter for the minimum value of omega acceleration parameter used in the ADI static field s
196. indows Single Processor Machines 7 WIRE definition 2 eee eee eee 62 WIRE sample input s esses esses 62 Workstation Network s eese eee eee 8 X X dependent function plasma definition 128 XDR format LSP Simulation Code 2 XOUOIluc sex RUE PES Gace den dci Redde 75 78 XGEN Integrated Tiger Series ITS Codes 3 XGEN method 4 00 eee ee eae 83 XGEN Method 4 Cross Section File 159 XGEN xgen data file 84 xgen data file definition 84 Y y dependent function plasma definition 128 Z z_dependent_function plasma definition 128 zero forces flag definition 74 186 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes Table of Contents 1 Introduction 4 RR RR ERR SERES 1 1 1 LSP Simulation Code aa ees 1 1 2 GLSP Preprocess0r aaa aaa 2 1 3 PA POSUprOCeSSOD uu ue tr RD De a Da 3 1 4 Integrated Tiger Series ITS Codes 00 3 2 CONVENTIONS axe RACE Ue neha ede 9 3 Running ESP od tis as A a ao 7 3 1 Single Processor Machines 0000 c cess ee eeee f 3 2 Multiple Processor Machines 0000s eee eeee 7 3 2 1 Workstation Network oooooooocccoomo 8 3 22 DEG Chister t ione NG oen t e ox e 8 3 23 Intel Teraflop 0 0 cee eee eee eee 8 IDA AS CIO kakantahan Erb IR e bee Satan tae 9
197. inetic and fluid electron species see Section 6 16 4 fluid species flag page 106 This is only relevant when a fluid electron plasma is present and requires the compiler directive FLUID PHYSICS to be defined see Section 4 4 25 FLUID PHYSICS page 18 Example Particle Species species1 charge 1 mass 1 0 fluid species flag off x migrant species flag o Species2 charge 1 mass 1 0 fluid species flag on migrant species flag on Particle Migration hybrid kinetic species 1 hybrid fluid species 2 hybrid kinetic species movie tag 3 hybrid fluid species movie tag 4 transition ratio 10 0 6 19 1 hybrid kinetic species integer The hybrid kinetic species parameter designates a kinetic electron species index to which fluid species i e those with fluid species flag on may migrate Additionally only those species designated by migrant species flag on may migrate to the hybrid kinetic species See Section 6 16 Particle Species Input page 104 6 19 2 hybrid fluid species integer The hybrid fluid species parameter designates a fluid electron species index to which kinetic species i e those with fluid species flag off may migrate Additionally only those species designated by migrant species flag on may migrate to the hybrid fluid species See Section 6 16 Particle Species Input page 104 6 19 3 hybrid kinetic species movie tag integer The hybrid kinetic species movie tag parameter designates
198. ional The parameters from to specify the lower and upper coordinate limits of the volume over which the field is applied They are optional and if not specified the field is applied everywhere These parameters are ignored for the simple COMPONENT type 6 15 5 reference point real optional The origin for the external field is shifted to the coordinates of reference point on the simulation grid Chapter 6 Input Variables 103 6 15 6 alignment axis string optional For a 1 D external field specifies the direction X Y Z of the spatial coordinate in the field data and the field component For a 2 D external field specifies the direction in the simulation grid XIY Z corresponding to the Z direction in the field data file This parameter has no effect for 3 D data contained in the MAG3D or MAFCO formats under the DATAFILE option Default Z 6 15 7 symmetry direction string optional For the ANALYTIC option only the transverse components of the magnetic field are cal culated analytically according to which option is specified symmetry direction DIR where DIR can have the values NONE X Y Z THETA The value NONE indicates that no transverse components are calculated Use of the THETA option produces an analytic ex pansion for the off axis cylindrically symmetric fields based upon the axial field specified in the spatial function Use of one of the X Y Z tokens will result in a single component of transver
199. ipt 1sp IBM SP2 9 sample file script lsp Intel Teraflop 8 sample input 2 D scattering 81 sample input 4 D backscattering 82 sample input backscatter 119 sample input BLOCK 04 57 sample input Child Langmuir emission 111 182 samp samp samp samp samp samp samp samp samp samp samp samp samp samp samp samp samp samp samp samp samp samp samp samp samp samp samp samp samp samp samp samp samp samp samp samp samp samp samp samp samp samp samp samp samp samp samp samp samp samp samp samp samp samp samp samp samp e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e non uniform spacing input higherstate e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e LSP User s Manual and Reference input circuit model input coax boundaries input conductivity method 1 input CONE tania cas ad input control o oooo oo input convolutional PML model input CYLINDER input desorption input dielectric material input dipole 0 input dump steps input dump_times input emission field limited input emission sou
200. is limited to the range 1 63 i e no more than 63 traces can be produced per trajectory instance The parameters associated with this model are described below Example trajectory charge_weight 0 at 10 0 20 0 interval 10 species 1 episodes time 2 0 to 2 time 3 0 to 3 end drift momentum O O O 5 5 Chapter 6 Input Variables 133 select 101000101010 movie tag 1 movie fraction 1 0 x 6 17 18 1 charge weight integer Electrical charge to be assigned to the tracer particles in units of charge If the value is zero then the particles respond to the electromagnetic fields but do not create any 6 17 18 2 episodes Defines one or more time windows during which tracer particles are generated The units for time are dependent upon which system of units has been specified by the user see Chapter 5 User Units page 25 6 17 18 3 select integer A set of 12 integers with values 0 no or 1 yes indicating which of the orbit quantities in the set x y z px py pz Ex Ey Ez Bx By Bz are written to the trajectory data file s 134 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes 6 18 Particle Collapse Input The Particle Collapse section specifies parameters which control the particle col lapse algorithm which is a means of periodically reducing the global particle number for a selected species The compiler directive PARTICLE_COLLAPSE must be defined see Sec tion 4 4 45 PARTICLE
201. is then used to obtain values for specific particle energies 6 9 27 minimum energy real Minimum energy in eV used in internal energy loss and scattering lookup tables Default 0 0 6 9 28 maximum energy real Maximum energy in eV used in internal energy loss and scattering lookup tables Default 1 e 9 6 9 29 components string Specifies the composition of the medium using the format components NAME1 fraction FRACTION1 NAME2 fraction FRACTION2 end where NAME1 NAME2 are material names from the list below and FRACTION1 FRACTION2 are fractions of each by volume The material names currently available are e helium e air e neon e argon e krypton e fluorine e xenon e sf6 e kapton e carbon e aluminum e iron e copper e molybdenum e silver e tantalum e tungsten e rhenium Chapter 6 Input Variables 79 e gold For each material an internal table has values for parameters such as atomic number atomic weight ionization potential and specific heat This list of components is required only if either the conductivity model the scattering model or the energy loss model is being invoked In addition to these materials if a material is required which is not on the list the user can define it in the Materials section of input see Section 6 8 Materials Input page 72 However only solid materials of the DENSE type can be utilized in this way for scattering and energ
202. ive_model NONE Example of a boundary with an incoming TEM transverse electromagnetic wave whose temporal dependence is given by function1 see Section 6 24 Functions Input page 144 with no absorption of the outgoing wave outlet from 0 0 0 5 0 0 to 0 5 0 5 0 0 phase velocity 1 no absorption on drive model POTENTIAL potentials 1 0 0 2 1 0 end temporal function 1 frequency 0 0 64 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes Example of a boundary in a cylindrical geometry simulation with a coax aligned with the Z axis The coax is attached to the external circuit model identified by circuit1 see Section 6 10 Circuit Models Input page 85 outlet from 9 0 0 0 0 0 to 12 0 6 2832 0 0 phase_velocity 1 drive_model ANALYTIC_TEM geometry COAXIAL modes i 0 0 inner_radius 9 0 outer_radius 12 0 circuit 1 connection rank 1 voltage measurement from 12 0 0 0 0 0 to 9 0 0 0 0 0 Waves can be launched in which the component of electric field carrying the wave is in the direction of a virtual coordinate of the simulation space Here is an example of an outlet boundary that launches a TEM transverse electromagnetic wave in a 1 dimensional simulation In this case the real coordinate is in the x direction while y and z are virtual coordinates Here the modes 0 0 1 indicates that the z component of electric field is the car rier and the function indicated by the temporal function parameter wh
203. kes the impact ionization model usually for a neutral species that is transformed into a singly ionized state The latter must be listed in the Particle Species section of input as a separate species directly following the neutral species see Section 6 16 Particle Species Input page 104 Cross sections as a function of energy must be supplied for the impacting electron species in a file specified in the Particle Interaction section see Section 6 21 Particle Interaction Input page 138 The compiler directive IONIZATION ON must be defined in order to use the ionization model see Section 4 4 32 IONIZATION ON page 19 If there are more than one ionizable species the compiler directive MUTABLE SPECIES must be set to an integer greater than or equal to the number of such species see Section 4 4 42 MUTABLE SPECIES page 20 The ionization interval is set by the ionization interval parameter in the Control section of input see Section 6 2 Control Input page 30 The model specific parameters are described below Generic parameters are described in Section 6 17 1 Particle Creation Parameters page 109 Example ionization from 0 0 0 0 2 0 to 1 0 0 0 10 0 Species 3 movie tag O electron species 5 movie tag O ionization factors 1 5 primary electrons 1 0 protons 0 0 neutrals 1 5 ions 1 5 secondary electrons end production rates 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 end thermal energy 500 movie
204. l Deflection angles are in degrees and will cause the injected beam to be deflected from its primary direction of propagation by these angles in the corresponding transverse directions which are in cyclical order X Y Z from the primary direction 6 17 6 9 deflection1 amp 2 function integer optional Integers identifying functions used to specify temporal dependence for the deflection angles These function supersede the constant values above and should give values in degrees See Section 6 24 Functions Input page 144 118 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes 6 17 6 10 convergence flag If convergence is ON indicates radial convergence of injected beam and must be followed by the focal_length parameter 6 17 6 11 focal length real Distance from the injection point at which the injected beam would converge to a focus if it were force free 6 17 6 12 rotation flag If rotation is ON indicates rotation of injected beam and must be followed by the omega parameter 6 17 6 13 omega real Angular rotation frequency of injected beam in units of rad sec c where c is the velocity of light in cm sec The beam is injected as a rigid rotor 6 17 7 secondary This model provides for emission of secondary electrons in one of two different ways depending upon which medium model is being used in the emitting surfaces The two models are the method 2 and the method 4 medium types see Section
205. l Value of the voltage for cases in which an initial constant charge is appropriate These are for example the static circuit type or either of the dynamic models in which a CHARGED or LCR termination is specified 6 10 10 voltage function integer optional Integer index which refers to the function in the Functions section specifying the time dependence of the inward going towards the simulation grid voltage at the first cir cuit model element see Section 6 24 Functions Input page 144 This should only be used with the static circuit type the transmission line type with the termination parameter set to VOLTAGE APPLICATION CHARGED or LCR or the network circuit wherever a junction type is set to VOLTAGE APPLICATION or TERMINATION where the termination type is either of CHARGED LCR or again VOLTAGE APPLICATION For the static circuit or the termination LCR case the function determines only the initial voltage at t 0 on the capacitor If voltage function is 0 no voltage is applied and is otherwise ignored when the termination parameter is any other kind Chapter 6 Input Variables 91 6 10 11 startup time real optional Allows the circuit model calculation to be started prior to the main calculation in the simulation grid e g in a case where the simulation is driven by the circuit model voltage it may take a significant amount of time for a nonzero voltage to reach the simulation boundary The units for tim
206. l and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes 6 17 9 2 ion species integer optional 120 6 17 9 3 stimulated ion fraction real optional 6 17 9 4 thermal_ion_tfraction real optional 121 6 17 9 5 electron species integer optional 121 6 17 9 6 monolayers real cire vete bes 121 6 17 9 7 threshold string amp real optional 121 6 17 9 8 binding energy real 121 6 17 9 9 maximum desorption rate real 121 6 17 9 10 stimulated cross section real 121 6 17 9 11 sampling rate real optional 121 6 17 9 12 minimum charge real optional 122 IN AA ed vera png 122 6 17 10 1 from to real c co es 122 6 17 10 2 species integer 123 6 17 10 3 ionization factors real optional 123 6 17 10 4 production rates real optional 123 6 17 11 higherstate 00 cece eee eee eee 123 6 17 11 1 from to real o antes clog fied Pete 124 6 17 11 2 ionization potential real 124 6 17 11 3 cross sections real 124 6 17 12 photoionization esses esses 124 6 17 12 1 model string ita rd 125 6 17 12 2 from to real sa nte eres eat es 126 6 17 12 3 species integer 126 6 17 12 4 production factor real 126 6 17 12 5 reference point real 126 6 17 12 6 source radius real 126 6 17 12 7 ionization potential real 126 6 17 12
207. lability on the computer system being used LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes Chapter 3 Running LSP 7 3 Running LSP LSP can be run on either single or multiple processor machines The multiple processor version is initiated by using the MULTI_PROCESS compiler directive see Section 4 4 41 MULTI PROCESS page 20 An input file must be present in order for LSP to run see Chapter 6 Input Variables page 27 and a command file may be present see Section 3 5 Command File page 11 but is optional 3 1 Single Processor Machines The single processor version of LSP will run on Unix Windows and Mac OS X work stations At the command line or shell prompt enter lsp r ra n N s input lsp where input 1sp is the user supplied input file To run in background with redirection of terminal output one can use 1sp opt input 1sp gt amp log amp assuming a C shell where log is the name of the file containing the redirected output The optional r flag is used to restart a previous run from a restart dump which wil have the name restart dat or restart alt This file is read after the input file is processed The restart file contains probe history particle and field data from the previous run If the rename_restart_flag is ON see Section 6 2 2 3 rename_restart_ flag page 32 then the most recent restart file may have the alt extension this can be
208. lark and T P Hughes float dx2 radial grid size float xis axial starting point float x2s radial starting point float Bz nx2 nx1 axial field values float Br nx2 nx1 radial field values where the field values are in normalized code units value in gauss divided by 1704 5 and spatial dimensions are in cm This file may be either formatted ASCII or binary type If it is the latter it must be indicated where the file is specified on input see Section 6 15 External Fields Input page 100 7 5 ATHETA Magnetic Field File The ASCII file format produced by the ATHETA code SNL can be generated using the following FORTRAN code Open Unit 25 File ATHETA DAT Form FORMATTED Status UNKNOWN Write 25 5 NK 1 NL 1 5 Format 215 Write 25 10 RPOS K K 1 NK Write 25 10 ZPOS L L 1 NL Write 25 10 BRFLD L K K 1 NK L 1 NL Write 25 10 BZFLD L K K 1 NK L 1 NL 10 Format 6 1PE12 4 where NK NL are the number of grid points in the radial and axial directions RPOS ZPOS are the radial and axial grid coordinates in meters and BRFLD BZFLD are the radial and axial components of the magnetic field in Tesla LSP interpolates the values onto the 2 D or 3 D simulation grid See Section 6 15 External Fields Input page 100 7 6 MAG3D Magnetic Field File The ASCII file produced by the MAG3D code NRL contains Bx By Bz data in cartesian coordinates as follows nxma
209. lasma quantities Plasma densities temperatures and collision frequencies by species These require the SCATTERING ON compiler directive be defined see Section 4 4 48 SCATTERING ON page 21 ohmic quantities Various ohmic medium quantities such as conductivity free electron density collision frequency and plasma temperature These require the USE OHMIC TERMS compiler directive be defined see Section 4 4 62 USE OHMIC TERMS page 23 rbtheta current This measures the radius B theta current It is only possible to measure in cylindrical coordinates therefore the CYLINDRICAL or CYL R Z compiler direc tive must be defined see Section 4 4 13 CYLINDRICAL page 16 rho background Evaluation of charge conservation that is divergence of the electric field mi nus rho The CHARGE DENSITY compiler directive is required to generate these quantities see Section 4 4 5 CHARGE DENSITY page 15 An example is scalar movie components number densities The default is no scalar components selected 6 2 10 32 scalar movie coordinate string amp real Specifies the direction normal to the plane from which data are extracted from a 3 D simulation to make a 2 D scalar movie and the coordinate value of the plane The direction can be X Y Z This parameter is ignored in 1 D or 2 D simulations An example is scalar movie coordinate Z 12 5 6 2 10 33 scalar_movie_interval integer Options for this parameter are 48 LS
210. le currently this must be 2 i e scattered energy and scattered angle followed on separate lines by the number of scattered energies in the table 20 in the example below the minimum scattered energy 2041 5 eV the maximum scattered energy 5 0e5 eV which is equal to the incident energy the number of scattered angles in the table 18 the minimum scattered angle 0 and the maximum scattered angle pi Scatter lookup table for Cu 2 20 2041 5 5 0e5 18 0 3 14159 Next is a comment line followed by the lookup table itself This consists of a 1 D array of scattered energies E and a 2 D array of scattered angles 67 such that using randomly generated indices i for energy and j for angle into these arrays gives energies and angles which reproduce the scattered distribution The arrays are written out in the sequence pre uos fd De BSH ORM AT Table 2 0415 0 0 0 173 7 2 Method 3 Backscattering File The method 3 see Section 6 9 33 method 3 page 82 backscattering table is a 4 dimensional lookup table For a range of incident energies and angles E 0 it allows scattered energies and angles Et to be calculated The table can be generated by running a Monte Carlo scattering calculation for each E 0 pair and computing a lookup table from the scattered distribution f E 0 The name of the file is the name of the material with the extension bst e g polystyrene bst The low ener
211. le species for ionization and scattering mod els Particle Diagnostics Used to generate data files containing particle diagnostic measurements as func tions of some specified variable Particle Targets Used to generate 2 D diagnostic maps of cumulative fluence energy and diver gence of particles passing through target planes Functions Specifies tabulated or analytic functions to be used during the simulation Probes Time sampled diagnostics for field and particle measurements Descriptions for the parameters for each of these sections follow Except for the Control section the parameters must appear in the same order as that given im the examples Also except for the Control section all parameters must appear except those designated with an asterisk in the input examples which are optional The sections themselves may appear in any order in the input file A good way to set up a simulation is to copy and edit the examples from this manual Note that while the keywords themselves must appear with the exact spelling indicated their values when alphanumeric may appear as lowercase or uppercase or even mixed The spelling of section headers must be exactly the same as shown with individual words beginning in uppercase letters eu d Blank lines and lines beginning with a semicolon in the input file are ignored A semicolon may be placed anywhere on a line to insert a comment Everything after the semicolo
212. ll species If the FLUID PHYSICS compiler directive is defined then scattering interval must be 1 Default 1 6 2 8 Fluid Physics Algorithm Chapter 6 Input Variables 39 6 2 8 1 fluid migration interval integer Number of timesteps between migrations of particles from kinetic to fluid when the fluid physics model is being used see Section 4 4 25 FLUID PHYSICS page 18 See Section 6 19 Particle Migration Input page 135 Default 0 6 2 8 2 fluid streaming factor real Used in the fluid model for a dense plasma see Section 6 16 4 fluid species flag page 106 At each timestep the fluid electron particle momenta are averaged with this fraction of the ensemble momentum interpolated from the grid Smaller values order 0 01 can reduce numerical diffusion of momentum and are recommended for ion species Larger values gt 0 1 have a stabilizing effect on grid noise and are recommended for electron species T hese can be set separately by using the fluid electron streaming factor and fluid ion streaming factor keywords The FLUID PHYSICS compiler directive must be invoked for this to have any effect see Section 4 4 25 FLUID PHYSICS page 18 Defaults 0 1 for electron species and 0 01 for ion species 6 2 8 3 flux limit fraction real Used in the fluid model for a dense plasma see Section 6 16 4 fluid species flag page 106 The heat flux cannot exceed this fraction of the maximum possible flux carried by
213. ll three of these are set to ON simultaneously then the spatial dependence of the density is radial about the reference point It is not necessary to set any of these on if the density function is simply defined to be a constant 6 17 13 8 momentum flags flag A set of flags for each of the dimensions X Y Z with ON or OFF values indicating the component direction s for which the momentum spatial dependence function is used If all three of these are set to ON simultaneously then the spatial dependence of the momenta is radial about the reference point At least one of these must have an ON value in order for the momentum function to be used 6 17 13 9 rotation flag If rotation is ON indicates rotation of the plasma about the defined reference point The angular momentum as a function of radius is determined by the combination of the momentum function and the momentum flags Note that two of those flags should be set on while the third is off Chapter 6 Input Variables 129 6 17 13 10 random energy function integer optional Integer identifying the function used for sampling of randomly directed energy Used instead of the thermal energy parameter This is usually a tabulated set of data pairs such that the independent variables are energies in eV and the ordinate values are relative probabilities Note that the user must set the sampling function parameter to yes under the appropriate function in the Functions section of inpu
214. location for both fields and particles is fully dynamic The code saves on memory by not allocating field storage inside conducting surfaces An array of pointers is used to access data objects for each cell which contain all relevant field quantities The particles are managed in groups in linked lists for each species and groups are added as their population increases For electromagnetic simulations without particles the code automatically skips both the particle memory allocation and the particle pushing algorithm There is essentially no run time overhead associated with the presence of the particle pushing code There are two electromagnetic field algorithms available a standard explicit Yee leapfrog algorithm and an implicit algorithm The implicit algorithm is particularly useful in relaxing the courant limit on the timestep An iterative electrostatic algorithm is also available for situations in which fields are slowly varying Grids can be specified in which the spacing varies linearly in each coordinate i e the cells can vary in size but the grid is still 2 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes orthogonal A first order wave absorbing boundary condition can be applied to openings ports at any of the spatial boundaries There are several options for pushing particles The standard momentum conserving PIC algorithm is the most widely known This algorithm yields no self particle forces but is subject to
215. ls and ions from a surface ionization collisional ionization usually applied to neutral ion species charge 0 higherstate currently this is a specialized ion ion stripping model photoionization ionization of neutral or charged species by photons plasma plasma existing in the simulation space at the start of the simulation excitation conversion of electrons from a low energy state to an excited state by laser acceleration fragmentation conversion of heavier molecules into smaller ones by bond breaking fileread injection using particle data from a previously created file fission numerical particle splitting in regions where the physics is hampered by the coarseness of particle statistics e g emission from the surface of a dense plasma trajectory tracer particles which produce an output file giving their trajectory and the fields acting on them All of these models are invoked from the Particle Creation section of the input file The following sections describe generic and model specific parameters for the models Sample models follow the first section Chapter 6 Input Variables 109 6 17 1 Particle Creation Parameters Parameters which are common to more than one model are described in the following sections 6 17 1 1 from to real The parameters from to specify the lower and upper limits of the area or volume over which the creation model is applied See the sections on the individual models to dete
216. ltage is understood to be that of the electrode at the lower coordinate relative to the one at the higher coordinate or the inner electrode to the outer one This parameter must be used when a wave source is required but no circuit model has been attached 6 6 1 14 frequency real optional Specifies the incoming wave frequency in Hz when drive model is WAVEGUIDE May also be optionally defined for other drive models 6 6 1 15 time delay real optional Specifies a time delay of the temporal dependence for any voltage driven model that is when a temporal function is specified 6 6 2 Symmetry Boundaries A symmetry boundary is a planar boundary which imposes mirror symmetry on the fields and particles There is no net current flow through the boundary and the magnetic field in the plane of symmetry is zero The from to parameters give the lower and upper limits of the boundary coordinates A symmetry boundary is illegal at zero radius in non cartesian coordinates Example symmetry from 0 0 0 5 0 0 to 0 0 0 5 2 5 Chapter 6 Input Variables 69 6 6 3 Periodic Boundaries Specifies the simulation coordinates over which periodic boundary conditions are imposed on fields and particles in the direction specified by the normal parameter The from to parameters give the lower and upper limits of the boundary coordinates Example periodic from 0 0 0 0 0 0 to 2 0 5 0 5 0 normal X 6 6 4 Freespace Boundaries Speci
217. lue of the con ductivity which is applied to ion currents This simply multiplies the value of the electron conductivity which is determined by the background electron conductivity parameter above Value should never be zero see Section 4 4 47 QUASINEUTRAL FIELDS page 21 Default 1 0 6 2 4 13 magnetic force filtering parameter real Applies temporal smoothing to the magnetic field applied to particles The value in the range 0 1 multiplies the old magnetic field This parameter should not be used with implicit particles that is when the DIRECT IMPLICIT compiler option is defined see Section 4 4 16 DIRECT IMPLICIT page 16 Default 0 0 no filtering 36 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes 6 2 4 14 magnetic spatial filtering parameter real Diffusion coefficient for spatial damping applied to magnetic field advance in the explicit field solver Typical values are in the range 0 1 to 0 25 Default 0 0 no filtering 6 2 4 15 small radius exclusion real Used in 3 D cylindrical coordinates to avoid the Courant instability limit on the timestep due to small grid spacing in the 0 Y coordinate near the axis THETA dependence is dropped from the field equations inside a radius defined by the small radius exclusion value Should be used with caution 6 2 4 16 time bias coefficient real Backward bias coefficient 0 a lt 1 in time biased field solver EN EN 1 xr cc
218. magnetic permeability mu as a cell quantity This provides greater flexibility in shaping paramagnetic materials using the medium models see Section 6 9 Medium Models Input page 73 This directive is required when using paramagnetic materials in the ADI field solver see Section 4 4 30 IMPLICIT_FIELDS page 19 It is invalid to use this directive with any of the static field solutions see Section 4 4 53 STATIC_FIELDS page 22 4 4 64 USE_PERMITTIVITY Include the electric permittivity epsilon as a cell quantity This provides greater flex ibility in shaping dielectric materials using the medium models see Section 6 9 Medium Models Input page 73 This directive is required when using dielectric materials in the ADI field solver see Section 4 4 30 IMPLICIT_FIELDS page 19 4 4 65 USE_PYTHON Enable use of user defined functions in Python format in the Functions section of input see Section 6 24 Functions Input page 144 4 4 66 USE_SUBCELLS Include the subcell structure as a cell quantity This enables the use of subgrid modeling such as the 2 d slope model see Section 6 13 Subgrid Models Input page 98 4 4 67 USE_SUBSTRATE Enable use of the substrate model which may be restricted by export control see Sec tion 6 14 Substrate Models Input page 99 4 4 68 USE QEOS Enable use of the qeos model which may be restricted by export control 24 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P
219. me of the sim ulation space over which the model is applied The cells within this volume which can cause particle creation are solid material cells only associated with a method 1 or method 3 medium model Any actual particle creation takes place on exposed surfaces of those cells 6 17 9 2 ion species integer optional Parameter identifying the species of desorbed ions which is normally the first ionized state of the neutral species adsorbed on the surface If not specified no ions are produced ion species N FRACTION where N is the species number and FRACTION is the fraction of the total particles produced which are ions Chapter 6 Input Variables 121 6 17 9 3 stimulated ion fraction real optional Parameter which determines the fractional amount of the stimulated desorption that goes into the ionized state as specified by ion_species 6 17 9 4 thermal ion fraction real optional Parameter which determines the fractional amount of the thermal desorption that goes into the ionized state as specified by ion species 6 17 9 5 electron species integer optional Parameter which determines the electron species to be produced along with the ion species if any When both species are specified the particles for each are created with equal weight 6 17 9 6 monolayers real Number of monolayers belonging to species which are initially adsorbed onto the sur face A monolayer is defined as a surface number de
220. minum substratel atomic_weight_of_metallic_layer 45 0 densities_of_materials 3 00 5 53 3 80 g cc radii_of_materials 0 1 0 07 0 2 depth_of_metallic_layer 6 0e 1 depth_of_ceramic_layer 14 0e 1 radial_resolution 50 axial_resolution 50 initial_temperature 300 0 kelvin ratio_H_to_M 1 0 ratio of absorbed hydrogen to metal ions reference_point 0 0 5 0 alignment_axis Z interval 10 species 2 minimum_charge 0 0 movie tag O movie fraction 0 0 100 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes 6 15 External Fields Input External fields are user prescribed fields which are added to the self consistent electro magnetic fields produced by the simulation exclusively for the purpose of affecting particle forces Single values 1 D arrays 2 D arrays and 3 D arrays of electric or magnetic fields can be used For 1 D arrays the field values are described by an input function as described below For 2 D and 3 D arrays the field values are read from user supplied data files The coordinate values for the external fields on these files need not match the LSP simulation grid as they are interpolated onto it For 2 D field arrays the data file contains cylindrical Bz Br data Two formats are supported one produced by the BFIELD code which can be in either ASCII text or binary form see Section 7 4 BFIELD Magnetic Field File page 159 and an ASCII text file produced by the SNL ATHETA code see Section 7 5
221. mited 113 emission source limited a 114 emission stimulated 22 ebrei DAGA anaes 114 Os 25 1 from to real sos piven ices a kaaa se seas 115 6 17 5 2 stimulating species integer optional VNDE Neh opt ue cua Maks EE en lt N PUE pts 115 6 17 5 3 charge factor real optional 115 mjection cz ceo pe EEG TOR eee 115 6 17 6 1_ from to real necp ertet 116 6 17 6 2 temporal function integer 116 6 17 6 3 spatial function integer 116 6 17 6 4 radius function integer optional 117 6 17 6 5 spatial momentum function integer pendent HAH GA cci etd is HAN tan Mk Dika 117 6 17 6 6 temporal momentum function integer PA NGABA bla ade PONKAN a Bl Pan 117 6 1 7 6 7 spatial Hass Hag ese eb rn 117 6 17 6 8 deflection1 2_angle real optional 117 6 17 6 9 deflection1 2 function integer optional Pm 117 6 17 6 10 convergence flag 118 6 17 6 11 focallength real s i eret 118 6 17 6 12 rotation Maple 118 6 17 6 13 omega Teal Geant tea sue kac niet 118 secondary oa hib dang hea RE RR 118 Gl fe volo from to heal ossa tet oe EQ Ge Ayy 119 6 17 7 2 speciesA integer optional 119 6 17 7 3 medium integer 1 2 e s 119 backscatter 2 424 iia da eee te Eee a 119 6 17 8 1_ from to tea esas eon aala 119 GESOLPUION cc vu itt trt re NE d Vm 119 6 17 9 1_ from to real veel ey Scere ates 120 ix LSP User s Manua
222. n 38 ADI field solver dielectric 94 ADI field solver DIRECT IMPLICIT 16 ADI field solver ferrite 95 ADI field solver implicit acceleration parameter 37 ADI field solver IMPLICIT_FIELDS 19 ADI field solver implicit_iterations 37 ADI field solver implicit_omega_min_factor 37 ADI field solver implicit_subcycles 37 ADI field solver implicit_tolerance 38 ADI field solver paramagnetic 96 ADI field solver USE PERMEABILITY 23 ADI field solver USE PERMITTIVITY 23 OMT st Leite Sdn IDA QVE ES EV 75 78 air chemistry conductivity medium 76 air chemistry USE_LOHMIC_TERMS 23 air chemistry vcrossb_flag 39 air model definition 0 00000 75 algorithm direct implicit 106 algorithm electromagnetic field 1 169 algorithm implicit plasma 37 algorithm moving frame 40 algorithm particles oooo oooooocooooo 2 algorithms list of 2 algorithms LSP Simulation Code 1 alignment axis definition 103 alignment axis symmetry direction 103 aluminum 22e YA NG YA Ap AA NAL et 72 78 applied current definition 34 applied current hysteresis 95 A ee ub xe be tad Dh 75 78 ASCIQu
223. n ASCII text data file containing the photoionization cross section data Presently the model calculates the photoionization cross sections from photoabsorption data of Henke et al Ref 7 The Henke data tables are available from various WEB sites including http xray uu se hypertext henke html or ftp grace 1bl gov pub sf This parameter is for the EXTERNAL SOURCE model only cross section file F NFF Chapter 6 Input Variables 127 6 17 13 plasma Creates particles inside the simulation space at the start of the simulation Jf an elec tromagnetic field algorithm is used the fields are zero at the start of a simulation so that the plasma is by definition neutral If only one plasma species is defined then effectively an immobile charge of the opposite sign is present This is not the case if STATIC_FIELDS or any of its related compiler directives is defined The model specific parameters are described below Generic parameters are described in Section 6 17 1 Particle Creation Parameters page 109 Example plasma from 5 0 5 0 5 0 to 5 0 5 0 5 0 Species 1 discrete numbers 22 2 density function 1 momentum function O X dependent function O x y dependent function O x z dependent function O reference point 0 0 O density flags 0 0 0 momentum_flags 0 0 0 drift_momentum 0 0 0 rotation off thermal_energy 10 0 random energy function O movie tag O movie fraction 0 0 6 17 13 1 from to
224. n on the line is ignored The order in which the input sections appear below is one possible order in which they might appear in an input file Chapter 6 Input Variables 29 6 1 Title Input The Title section of the input file specifies a title to be used in all output files for identification of the simulation If not specified the default generic title used is LSP simulation The input file name and the time stamp generated at the beginning of the simulation run are appended to the title The simulation title must be contained within double quotes An example is Title Simulation_title This is a title 30 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes 6 2 Control Input The Control section of the input file specifies the timestep simulation time algo rithmic and diagnostic parameters etc In this section and only this one the parameters may be specified in any order All of these parameters are optional and are not required to run a simulation However without some minimal parameters such as a time limit and a timestep specification nothing meaningful would be calculated There are many parameters from which to select The parameters are listed alphabetically and discussed individually below An example is Control courant multiplier 0 9 time limit ns 20 0 time bias coefficient 0 5 time bias iterations 4 probe interval 5 dump interval ns 10 0 particle movie interval 100 restart
225. n using cylindrical coordinates for the simulation grid Obviously the direction normal DIR must be Z for the latter option The signed values for DIR cause the target to be selective as to particle direction while unsigned values will accept particles traveling either way When present TMIN and TMAX window the time period over which data is taken Otherwise data is accumulated over all time The EMIN and EMAX parameters determine the energy range in eV of particles accepted Default values are zero and infinity In addition multiple species can be lumped together in the same target measurement simply by listing them in sequence Examples Particle Targets targeti SQUARE Species 1 normal Z x divisions 10 y divisions 20 z divisions 0 from 0 0 0 2 to 0 2 0 2 Chapter 6 Input Variables 143 time O to 35 ns minimum_energy 1000 eV maximum_energy 5000 eV target2 RADIAL species 2 3 4 three species together normal Z x divisions 10 y divisions 60 z divisions 0 from 0 0 0 0 4 0 to 0 5 6 283 4 0 minimum_energy 0 0 maximum energy 1 0e6 The data for all targets are written to a file named targN p4 where N is the timestep on which the data are written The data file may be written in ASCII text format or binary depending upon the choice of the target output format parameter on input see Section 6 2 Control Input page 30 144 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Cl
226. ned on see Section 6 2 3 4 region balance flag page 33 then the code will in addition move processes from one region to another as needed The number of domains but not the number of regions can be altered from input prior to a restart as long as the compiler directive MULTI PROCESS was defined to begin with see Chapter 3 Running LSP page 7 Doing so however may cause the simulation to run in an unbalanced state until the next load balance occurs The sizes and distribution of domains can also be altered However manually setting the domain configuration from input prior to a restart requires that either the automatic load balance algorithm be turned off or that the override balance flag is set to ON see Section 6 2 3 6 override balance flag page 33 56 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes 6 5 Objects Input Material structures can be created within the simulation grid using geometric shapes specified in the Objects section of the input file Complex shapes can be built by adding conducting and nonconducting vacuum or material objects together The effect of a list of successive objects is cumulative an object defines the cells within its boundaries to have specified properties overriding any properties set by objects which appear before it in the list This is a versatile model but is not a full Computational Solid Geometry CSG model Each object has a conductor flag associated wi
227. nits page 25 The units for rotational coordinates in cylindrical or spherical geometries are radians Input parameters for the simulation are governed through the input file In this manual input file examples and references to input keywords and the values which follow them appear in typewriter font When the parameter values are alphanumeric symbols they can be written either in lowercase or uppercase characters but the keywords identifiers themselves are written only in lowercase Values assigned to the parameters can be of four types real Real numbers e g 1 0 01 0 01 1 0e 1 integer Integer numbers e g 1 1 1 flag Can take the values ON or equivalently TRUE and OFF or equivalently FALSE string An alphanumeric string without quotation marks e g tantalum tab In the input examples optional data are followed by an asterisk Keyboard input typed at command prompt is shown in this font The index also incorporates certain conventions Concepts are shown in lower case Commands are shown in the same fonts as within the document Each index entry is followed by the section in which it is found We use the word simulation to refer to the entire process in the application of the LSP code to some physical model whereas the word run usually refers to a single period of uninterupted calculation that is any simulation may require many runs as determined by time restraints or processor avai
228. nput 69 Perleval Preprocessor esses 165 R E Clark and T P Hughes permeability definition 74 permeability magnetic method 0 79 permeability magnetic permeability 74 permeability magnetic USE PERMEABILITY 23 permeability method 0 o o ooo ooo oo o 79 permittivity electric dielectric_constant 73 permittivity electric method 0 79 permittivity electric USE PERMITTIVITY 23 pgroup sample file Workstation Network 8 phase velocity definition 66 PHI pctv BENG BZ taa 148 photoionization definition 124 photoionization sample input 125 photoionization atomic number 105 photoionization Particle Species Input 104 Photon Output Data File 162 photon cutoff energy definition 84 photon output format definition 46 photon output format sample input 46 PIC particle in cell 000000 0000 1 PIC particle in cell LSP Simulation Code 2 plasma definition 127 plasma sample input 127 plasma discrete numbers 109 PML perfectly matched layer Freespace Bound ari s 22 9 B RB Api vb 69 PML perfectly matched layer FREESPACE_PML Mitt eh eee TEENS UP POT tweet tek Sees 18 PML model sample input 69 Point Probes
229. nsity of 10 cm 6 17 9 7 threshold string amp real optional Breakdown criterion to initiate desorption using either the surface electric field strength or the temperature as the threshold value The format is threshold TYPE VALUE where TYPE is either field stress or temperature and VALUE is the magnitude of the electric field or the temperature in degrees kelvins When this parameter is not used desorption will occur as if the threshold has been exceeded 6 17 9 8 binding_energy real Binding energy of the adsorbed species to the surface substrate in eV 6 17 9 9 maximum desorption rate real Upper bound on the rate of desorption in units of monolayers per unit time see Chap ter 5 User Units page 25 6 17 9 10 stimulated cross section real Cross section assumed to be constant for stimulated desorption of species by electrons in units of area which is dependent upon the system of units specified by the user see Chapter 5 User Units page 25 6 17 9 11 sampling rate real optional Sampling rate for random selection of events as a unitless fraction The default value causes every trial which passes the other criteria to produce an event Default 1 0 122 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes 6 17 9 12 minimum charge real optional Lower bound on the numerical weight of desorbed particles in units of charge Default 0 0 6 17 10 ionization Invo
230. o 75 78 MAX_RESONANCES compiler directives 20 MAX RESONANCES ferrite 94 MAX SPECIES compiler directives 20 MAX SPECIES higherstate 123 MAX SPECIES NUMBER DENSITIES 21 MAX SPECIES SCATTERING 0ON 21 maximum desorption rate definition 121 maximum energy definition 78 maximum_number collapse definition 134 maximum number fission definition 132 maximum restart dump time definition 31 medium secondary definition 119 medium definition 00 0 110 Medium Models Input 4 73 177 Medium Models Input emission stimulated M Create te Mise Ve an RE See En AG 114 Medium Models Input ENERGY_DEPOSITION 17 Medium Models Input Integrated Tiger Series A nate NAMA 3 Medium Models Input KELVIN_DEPOSITION 19 Medium Models Input Materials Input 72 Medium Models Input medium secondary 119 Medium Models Input Objects Input 56 Medium Models Input secondary 118 Medium Models Input threshold emission 113 Medium Models Input USE OHMIC TERMS 23 Medium Models Input USE PERMEABILITY 23 Medium Models Input USE PERMITTIVITY 23 message passing interface MPI Compiling on Unix and Mac OS X uuuuuuue 13 message passing interface MPI Multipl
231. o bie so that w 0 A 0 B Hs Moo 0 The values Hs Hu give the zero and infinite frequency limits of the permeability respectively The ferrite model cannot be used with the ADI field solver see Section 4 4 30 IMPLICIT FIELDS page 19 The format is volumel ferrite from XMIN YMIN ZMIN to XMAX YMAX ZMAX permeability MU_STATIC MU_INF resonances sine coefficient S1 cosine coefficient C1 decay_rate DELTA1 frequency FREQ1 sine coefficient 52 cosine coefficient C2 decay_rate DELTA2 frequency FREQ2 end where XMIN YMIN ZMIN XMAX YMAX ZMAX are diagonally opposite corners of the volume MU_STATIC is the limiting value of the magnetic permeability for zero frequency MU_INF is the limiting value of the magnetic permeability for infinite frequency S1 and C1 are the coefficients in the representation of the response function and FREQ1 DELTA1 are the resonant frequency in rads sec and decay rate 1 sec of the first resonance Up to MAX_RESONANCES see Section 4 4 39 MAX_RESONANCES page 20 relaxations resonances can be specified between the resonances and end keywords 6 11 5 hysteresis The magnetic hysteresis model utilizes both magnetic induction and magnetic intensity in the cells in order to model magnetic hysteresis phenomena The format is volumel hysteresis from XMIN YMIN ZMIN to 5 XMAX YMAX ZMAX data file FILE where XMIN
232. o yes the data is interpreted as a sampling function which entails integration and inversion and can be used for energy sampling in some particle creation routines The resolution number is the number of sampling bins used If not specified the default value will be 1000 bins An analytic function definition has the form functionl type 5 plus minus exponential coefficients CO C1 C2 C3 or if it uses a power functionl type 12 one minus exponential rise and fall coefficients CO C1 C2 power N where CO C1 are coefficients and N denotes an integral power The value of the type parameter is O for a tabulated function 1 18 for analytic functions 20 for a polynomial 30 for numerical data on a file and 40 for a 2 D function In the case of function type 20 which is a polynomial the format is functionl type 20 coefficients Chapter 6 Input Variables 145 CO C1 C2 end In the case of function type 30 which designates numerical data contained on an inde pendently generated file the format is functionl type 30 data file f1 dat independent variable multiplier 1 0 dependent variable multiplier 1 0 which designates the file containing the numerical data in ASCII format The data is arranged in pairs usually in two columns consisting of floating point values of the indepen dent and dependent variables respectively This is similar to the type O tabulated function defined above but may
233. obability of ionization by a particle is calculated every ionization interval timesteps see Section 6 2 7 1 ionization interval page 38 The production rate gives the number of new simulation particles resulting from this calculation as a fraction of the number of primary particles The charge represented by the new particles is consistent with the physical ionization probability For some calculations using production rates instead of ionization factors provides a convenient way of controlling the number of ions and secondary electrons produced As an example if one wants the number of ions to equal the number of primary particles inside the from to volume after N timesteps the production rate should be set to ionization interval N The number of entries should equal the number of species in the calculation and are listed in the order that the species appear in the Particle Species input section see Section 6 16 Particle Species Input page 104 The code cannot produce more than one ion per event so the production rate must be less than 1 a value exactly equal to 1 will cause the code to revert to the ionization factors method above A value of 0 means that the species corresponding to this entry produces no ionization 6 17 11 higherstate This is a specialized model for charge stripping of ions by ions The ion species must already exist in a charge state of 1 The compiler directive NUMBER DENSITIES must be defined along with MA
234. objects which cover the desired area or by using the SOLID object to make all cells conducting In order to set guard cell properties conducting objects within the simulation space which are in contact with the boundary need to extend through the boundary to encompass the two guard cells rather than stopping at the boundary see Section 6 5 Objects Input page 56 The converse applies when the SOLID object qualifier see Section 6 5 10 SOLID page 61 is used to make the entire simulation space conducting in that case subsequent nonconducting objects within the simulation space which are in contact with the boundary need to extend through the boundary in order for nonconducting boundary conditions to be used A nonconducting boundary must be an Outlet Symmetry Periodic or Freespace boundary The type must be specified in the Boundaries section of the input file it is not sufficient to put a nonconducting object through the boundary If the control variable domain_boundary_check is ON see Section 6 2 11 1 domain_ boundary_check page 49 the code checks that a boundary condition has been defined for each boundary cell 6 6 1 Outlet Boundaries An outlet boundary is a port which allows electromagnetic waves to leave the simulation space and optionally allows user specified waves to enter Example of a purely outgoing wave absorbing boundary no incoming waves outlet from 0 0 0 5 0 0 to 0 5 0 5 0 0 phase_velocity 1 dr
235. odels motion in the z coordinate the gridding in z must be strictly uniform and no domain splits are permitted across that coordinate direction Default 0 0 6 2 9 2 moving frame start time real If moving frame start time is non zero the moving frame of reference model will be gin at that simulation time Until that time the simulation will proceed as if stable before moving at the velocity indicated above Default 0 0 6 2 10 Diagnostic Output 6 2 10 1 dump accelerations flag flag If dump accelerations flag is ON output fluid accelerations to the vector fields dump file for each species The SCATTERING ON compiler directive must be invoked for these quantities to be available otherwise no values are written see Section 4 4 48 SCATTERING_ ON page 21 Default OFF 6 2 10 2 dump bfield flag flag If dump bfield flag is ON output magnetic fields to the vector fields dump file Default ON 6 2 10 3 dump charge density flag flag If dump charge density flag is ON output particle charge densities to the scalar dump file The CHARGE DENSITY compiler directive is needed to generate these quantities see Section 4 4 5 CHARGE DENSITY page 15 If no values are available nothing is written to the dump file Default OFF Chapter 6 Input Variables Al 6 2 10 4 dump conductivity flag flag If dump conductivity flag is ON output conductivities to the fields dump file The USE CONDUCTIVITY compiler
236. oefficients 1 0 0 5 An example of a 3 variable function is as follows function4 def sphere x y z if sqrt x x y y z z gt 5 return 0 return 1 148 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes 6 25 Probes Input The Probes section defines the type and location of various diagnostic time histories which are written at intervals given by probe_interval see Section 6 2 10 30 probe_ interval page 46 to the file history p4 where the p4 extension indicates it is readable by the P4 postprocessor There are probes for grid quantities at single points spatial integrals of grid quantities and particle quantities as described below Any probe may be given its own label by the user If not a descriptive label is assigned by the code to appear on the time history file 6 25 1 Point Probes Point probes are used for grid quantities like fields and currents Fields can be obtained either at their actual staggered grid locations or at the cell corner positions which have the averaged field values applied to particles The latter are usually more convenient since the staggered location of a field depends on its orientation Electric fields and currents are at the half grid positions in the direction they point and at the cell edges in the plane normal to them Magnetic fields are at the full grid positions in the direction they point and at the center of the faces normal to them The format of a point prob
237. oionization definition 126 from to plasma definition 127 from to secondary definition 119 from to stimulated definition 115 FULL SUSCEPTIBILITY compiler directives 19 R E Clark and T P Hughes FUNCTION definition 004 59 FUNCTION sample input 59 Functions Input 90 144 Functions Input sample input 144 Functions Input centroidi amp 2 function 110 Functions Input conductivity 93 Functions Input deflection1 2 function 117 Functions Input dielectric 93 Functions Input dipole 4 94 Functions Input drive model 66 Functions Input impedance product function e NANG Bc Anite eade fo 91 Functions Input Outlet Bounaries 68 Functions Input Outlet Boundaries 63 64 Functions Input paramagnetic 96 Functions Input radius function 117 Functions Input recycle time 131 Functions Input spatial function injection Sota Rua e e Ri suc IHRER ERU act 116 Functions Input spatial function medium ERE 76 Functions Input spatial_momentum_function a deos O 117 Functions Input temporal_function excitation E AA P 129 Functions Input temporal_function external it AA tb ete et s 103 Functions Input temporal function fileread iia det tare eh pete tends UD
238. olution The method is designed to cycle through values of omega which cover the theoretical range of eigenvalues associated with the discretization of the problem space However it has been found that this process can be optimized somewhat by raising the minimum value slightly thereby narrowing the entire range of omegas used This is done by specifying an adjustment parameter less than 1 0 and can only be determined by trial and error A representative number found in an early investigation was 0 25 Default 1 0 6 2 5 5 implicit subcycles integer Number of subcycles to be used in the ADI method of the static field solution Requires either the IMPLICIT FIELDS or the DIRECT IMPLICIT and the STATIC FIELDS compiler directives This governs the spacing of omega values which go into the static ADI solution during the iterative process That is the higher the number of subcycles specified then the more discrete values of omega are used to cover the range of eigenvalues in the solution The user can increase this number if the ADI solution is not converging well Default 4 38 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes 6 2 5 6 implicit_tolerance real Convergence criterion for the ADI field solution The default value is 1 e 3 but it is suggested that a more typical value to use would be around 1 e 5 See Section 4 4 30 IMPLICIT FIELDS page 19 6 2 6 Static Field Algorithm 6 2 6 1 acceleration parameter real
239. on 118 FOIL definition 58 FOIL sample input aan 59 foil model electron probability 82 foil model primary probability 82 foil model secondary a 118 foil model thickness a 80 fonts Conventions eee eee eee eee 5 format definition 102 fragmentation definition 130 fragmentation sample input 130 Freespace Boundaries aaa 69 freespace boundaries sample input 69 Freespace Boundaries FREESPACE_PML 18 FREESPACE_PML compiler directives 18 frequency outlet boundary definition 68 frequency definition 91 FRICTIONAL EFFECTS compiler directives 18 from to backscatter definition 119 from to desorption definition 120 from to emission definition 112 from to excitation definition 129 from to external field definition 102 from to fileread definition 131 from to fission definition 132 from to fragmentation definition 130 from to higherstate definition 124 from to injection definition 116 from to ionization definition 122 from to outlet boundary definition 65 from to particle creation definition 109 from to phot
240. on setup 2x in 1 D 4x in 2 D 8x in 3 D Use of this model requires the PARTICLE_COLLAPSE compiler option be defined see Section 4 4 Compiler Directives page 15 The model specific parameters are described below Generic parameters are described in Section 6 17 1 Particle Creation Parameters page 109 Example Particle splitting fission from 0 0 2 to 1 0 2 interval 100 species 3 maximum number 20 0 0 0 0 5 0 3 6 17 17 1 from to real For the fission model these coordinate parameters describe a volume of the simulation space over which the particle splitting is applied 6 17 17 2 maximum number integer Number of particles per cell above which the splitting procedure is terminated 6 17 18 trajectory Used to introduce tracer particles with a specified charge weighting If the charge weighting is zero the particles are affected by the electromagnetic fields but do not generate any i e they behave like test particles Trajectory data position momenta fields for these particles are written to an ASCII data file for as long as they exist in the simulation There can be more than one instance of trajectory input to produce trajectories starting from different locations The file name is trMpN p4 where M is an integer identifying which instance of trajectory input that the data is associated with and N numbers the trajectories within that particular instance Currently N
241. opriate medium models is specified for them This applies to the method 1 method 3 and method 4 medium models see Section 6 9 Medium Models Input page 73 This thermal deposition can be used for diagnostic purposes but it is necessary for any particle emission model in which a thermal breakdown is in effect see Section 6 17 2 3 threshold emission page 113 4 4 34 LONG LONG INT Defines long long int instead of long int data type for compilers that require that extension in order to get an 8 byte integer 20 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes 4 4 35 MAGNETIC_DISPERSION Required if the ferrite complex magnetic permeability model is to be used see Sec tion 6 11 4 ferrite page 94 4 4 36 MAGNETIC_HYSTERESIS Required if the magnetic hysteresis model is to be used see Section 6 11 5 hysteresis page 95 4 4 37 MAGNETOSTATIC Solve for magnetostatic fields This is used in conjunction with the STATIC_FIELDS option see Section 4 4 53 STATIC_FIELDS page 22 4 4 38 MAGNETOSTATIC_FFT2D Solve for transverse magnetostatic fields using the FFT method assuming rectangular conducting simulation boundaries Useful for some paraxial beam simulations 4 4 39 MAX_RESONANCES Sets the maximum number of resonant frequencies in the ferrite model see Section 6 11 4 ferrite page 94 4 4 40 MAX_SPECIES Sets the maximum number of particle species present in the simulation for the pa
242. ors Incorrect usage of compiler directives may cause an error message This is usually the result of misspelling one of the standard options in the list of compiler directives specified by the user n example is Compiled Tue Jan 22 10 30 16 MST 2002 on mrcdec mrcabq com Compiler flags g stdl Code options defined by user DCYL R Z DCHARGE DENISTY Code options defined at compile time Chapter 4 Compiling LSP 15 CYLINDRICAL CYL_R_Z Fatal error Code compiled with unknown option CHARGE DENISTY Simulation abort on Tue Jan 22 10 33 37 2002 Here the user specified CHARGE DENISTY in the list of defined compiler options where CHARGE DENSITY was intended 4 3 3 Incompatible Compiler Directive Errors There are some combinations of compiler directives which are incompatible In this case a compiler error message will appear and the compilation will stop Some options require another option to be included Again if not defined correctly an error occurs causing the compilation to stop 4 4 Compiler Directives 4 4 1 CAR ONE Use 1 D cartesian x coordinates 4 4 2 CAR X Y Use 2 D cartesian x y coordinates 4 4 3 CAR X Z Use 2 D cartesian x z coordinates 4 4 4 CARTESIAN Use 3 D cartesian x y z coordinates This is the default coordinate system 4 4 5 CHARGE DENSITY Computes total charge density as a cell quantity Required if the electrostatic field solver is used see Section 4 4 53 STATIC F
243. os 13 output file lsppdf ps 00 13 output file struct dat o o o ooooo 48 output file struct p4 ooo 48 output file targN p4P ooooommommommo 143 output file Single Processor Machines 7 output formats Compiling on Unix and Mac OS X E E a PA 13 output formats photon output format 46 output formats primary output format 46 output formats structure output format 48 output formats target movie interval 49 output formats target output format 49 override balance flag definition 33 179 P P4 Postprocessor 0 see cece n 3 P4 Postprocessor dump surface depositions flag 43 P4 Postprocessor LSP Simulation Code 2 P4 Postprocessor movie fraction 111 P4 Postprocessor movie tag 111 P4 Postprocessor structure output format 48 P4 Postprocessor target output format 49 PARABOLOID definition 04 59 PARABOLOID sample input 59 Parallel Processing 000oooooooooooo 32 parallel processing balance_interval 32 parallel processing initial_balance_flag 33 parallel processing load_balance_flag 33 parallel processing MULTI PROCESS 20 parallel processing Multiple Processor Machines A NG ba hbng KANG 7 parallel processing number of processes 33 parallel processing ov
244. oundary conditions 71 discrete_numbers definition 109 documentation l l eee 13 domain boundary check definition 49 domain boundary check Boundaries Input 63 domains dump timing flag 50 domains LSP Simulation Code 1 domains MULTI PROCESS suus 20 domains number of processes 33 domains Regions Input 54 domains report timing flag 51 DOUBLE PRECISION compiler directives 17 drift momentum definition 110 drift velocity definition 110 drive model definition 0 66 drive model frequency outlet boundary 68 drive model inner radius 67 drive model outer_radius 67 drive_model Outlet Boundaries 68 drive model time delay 68 drive model voltage measurement 68 dump Command File 2 2 oo 11 dump_accelerations_flag definition 40 dump_bfield_flag definition 40 dump charge density flag definition 40 dump_conductivity_flag definition Al dump current density flag definition Al dump energy deposition flag definition 41 dump interval definition Al dump_montecarlo_diagnostics_flag definition Seeded PD 41 dump number densities
245. pecies appearing in all stimulated emission input requests see Section 6 17 5 emission stimulated page 114 Default 1 4 4 57 SUBCYCLING ON Enable subcycling in the particle advancement whenever the cyclotron frequency be comes high enough to cause inaccuracy in the kinematical calculations 4 4 58 TEMPORAL FILTER Use temporal filtering in the electromagnetic field equations This is only appropriate under certain conditions For example it is never used with any static fields solution It can be used with the explicit fields solution only if time biasing is not being used It can also be used with the exact version of the implicit fields solution See Section 6 2 4 18 temporal filtering parameter page 36 4 4 59 UNITS CGS User units are the standard cgs system of units Chapter 4 Compiling LSP 23 4 4 60 UNITS_MKS User units are the standard mks system of units 4 4 61 USE_CONDUCTIVITY Include conductivities as a cell quantity This directive is relevant to any of the dynamic field soutions 4 4 62 USE_OHMIC_TERMS Include certain fluid related properties of a plasma such as conductivity and fluid velocity in the cells These quantities are required for the conductivity model of a gaseous medium see Section 6 9 Medium Models Input page 73 It is invalid to use this directive with any of the static field solutions see Section 4 4 53 STATIC_FIELDS page 22 4 4 63 USE_PERMEABILITY Include the
246. pecifies how the region is divided into domains For these parameters NDOM is the number of domains into which the region is subdivided and DIR gives the coordinate direction along which the region is divided into domains and can have the values X Y Z The number_of_cells parameter is either a list of the number of cells thickness for each domain or simply has the value auto in which case the code divides the number of cells along the split direction as evenly as possible among the domains If a list of numbers is given there must be one per domain and they must add up to the total number of cells in the split direction of the region This may be difficult to use if that Chapter 6 Input Variables 55 number is not known The minimum value for the number of cells in any linear dimension of a domain that can be used depends on the field solution method being used For example with the explicit field solver the smallest value is limited to 3 cells With the implicit field solver or any of the static solutions the number is 2 If the number_of_domains parameter has a value of 1 or is not present the split direction and number of cells parameters are not required If load balancing within regions is turned on see Section 6 2 3 2 load balance flag page 33 then the code will adjust the number of cells in each domain as needed to try to get a more even distribution of the computational load If load balancing between regions is tur
247. perfor mance data in the reports for all domains Shown are timing measurements in various categories including field solution particle solution diagnostics and inter process commu nication In addition the total time is included which will be slightly greater than the sum of the sub categories due to start up time All timing data are in seconds Default OFF 52 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes 6 3 Grid Input The Grid section of input defines the overall simulation space and the grid spacing within it More than one grid may be specified but along the common boundary between any two grids the grid points must match up The coordinate system used for the spatial grid is determined by compiler directives Cartesian cylindrical or spherical coordinates may be used in 1 2 or 3 dimensions The relevant compiler directive options are CARTESIAN CAR_ONE CAR_X_Y CAR_X_Z CYLINDRICAL CYL ONE CYL_R_Z CYL_R_TH SPHERICAL SPH_ONE and SPH R TH The default is 3 D cartesian coordinates When more than one grid is specified they should be numbered consecutively in the input file each beginning with an identifier in this format gridN where each N is a unique identification number When only one grid is present this line is not required The lines that follow describe the grid dimensions and spacing in the three coordinate directions xmin XMIN xmax XMAX x cells NX ymin YMIN ymax YMAX
248. pide ete ee tee 148 Point Probes sample input 148 polar angle definition 77 polar_angle azimuthal_angle 77 poloidal angles definition 81 positron data file definition 82 positron probability definition 82 positrons secondary esee o 118 postprocessors dump surface depositions flag sare SANG et o ne RR de pe nde Moo A aag 43 postprocessors GLSP Preprocessor 2 postprocessors LSP Simulation Code 2 postprocessors movie fraction 111 postprocessors movie tag 111 postprocessors P4 Postprocessor 3 postprocessors photon output format 46 postprocessors primary output format 46 postprocessors structure output format 48 postprocessors target output format 49 potential iterations definition 38 potential tolerance definition 38 potentials definition 0 66 potentials sample input sss 71 Potentials Tap t ns acre noe eee ey ea 71 Potentials Input Circuit Models Input 85 Potentials Input Objects Input 56 preprocessors GLSP Preprocessor 2 preprocessors Perleval Preprocessor 165 Primary Output Data File 162 Chapter 10 General Index Primary Output Data File extract_photons_flag a
249. ps 6 2 10 8 dump montecarlo diagnostics flag flag If dump montecarlo diagnostics flag is ON output nu dt distributions for the monte carlo energy loss particle scattering model to the diagnostic dump file If none are available no values are written This option is relevant only when the montecarlo scattering flag 42 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes has been defined for some particle species and the appropriate interaction file has been pro vided in the Particle Interaction section of input see Section 6 21 Particle Interaction Input page 138 Also the SCATTERING_ON compiler directive must be defined in order for this option to be relevant see Section 4 4 48 SCATTERING_ON page 21 Default OFF 6 2 10 9 dump number densities flag flag If dump number densities flag is ON output particle number densities to the scalar dump file The NUMBER DENSITIES compiler directive is needed to generate these quantities see Section 4 4 44 NUMBER DENSITIES page 21 If no values are available nothing is written to the dump file Default OFF 6 2 10 10 dump ohmic quantities flag flag If dump ohmic quantities flag is ON output quantities associated with the ohmic medium model to the scalar dump file If no values are available nothing is written to the dump file These quanitities are generated when the conductivity option is used in a method 0 method 1 or method 4 medium of the TENUOUS
250. pt lsp Intel Teraflop 8 input file trMpN p4 132 input instructions lesen 28 Input Parameter Errors oooooooo 11 Input Variables oooooooooooooo 27 integer parameter type a 5 Integrated Probes oooccoocccccccccccc 148 Integrated Probes sample input 148 Integrated Tiger Series ITS codes 3 Integrated Tiger Series ITS codes method medium escort eet ES 73 Integrated Tiger Series ITS codes method 2 81 176 LSP User s Manual and Reference Integrated Tiger Series ITS codes method 3 82 Integrated Tiger Series ITS codes method 4 83 Integrated Tiger Series ITS codes xgen_data_file 84 Intel Teraflop inca cutie vaca im ci bn 8 INTER DOMAIN TRACKING compiler directives 19 interaction files Particle Interaction Input EIE 138 intermediary formats 0 000 13 intersection Objects Input 56 interval collapse definition 134 interval definitiOL o ooooo o 109 interval production factor 126 Introduction ib ile pe aida 1 ion conductivity factor definition 35 ion species definition 120 ion species sample input 120 ion species stimulated ion fraction 121 ion species thermal ion fraction 121 ionization definition 4 122 ioni
251. pter 10 General Index secondary method 4 o ooo ooocooccooc oo 83 secondary positron probability 82 segments definition sese 87 segments sample input 8T select definition 133 selection ratio definition 107 semicolon Las KG rodga a ee eee eS 28 O 75 78 shapes Objects Input 56 57 SIGME bid il dq 148 silver dior koh nG LA KB AG nah s T2 78 simulation grid Grid s 52 Simulation Restarts aa 31 Single Processor Machines 7 slice times definition 111 slice times Particle Slice Probes 153 slop Model eiie RA RR SR ded 98 small radius exclusion definition 36 SOLID definition 0 cee ee eee 61 SOLID sample input 0000 61 SOLID Boundaries Input 63 source_current_density emission source limited a 114 source_radius definition 126 space charge limited emission model emission child langmuir 000 0008 111 SPATIAL_FILTER compiler directives 21 spatial_flags injection definition 117 spatial_flags medium definition 76 spatial_flags radius_function 117 spatial_flags spatial_function injection A qur Ae ates O OS dad 116 Spatial flags spatial momentum function AA Lid e RR 117 spati
252. r real optional 107 6 16 12 selection ratio integer optional 107 6 17 Particle Creation Input 108 6 17 1 Particle Creation Parameters 109 Gel lel from to nea stp zoo oen Tee p i 109 6 17 1 2 normal string aae eae os 109 6 17 1 3 interval integer 109 6 17 1 4 species integer 109 6 17 1 5 electron species integer 109 6 17 1 6 discrete numbers integer optional 109 6 17 1 7 centroid1 amp 2 function integer optional 110 6 17 2 6 17 3 6 17 4 6 17 5 6 17 6 6 17 7 6 17 8 6 17 9 6 17 1 9 drift momentum real 110 6 17 1 10 dritt velocity realidad 110 6 17 1 11 random Ma is Bester ira 110 6 17 1 12 medium integer optional 110 6 17 1 13 charge factor real optional 110 6 17 1 14 thermal energy real optional 111 6 17 1 15 slice times integer optional 111 6 17 1 16 movie_tag integer optional 111 6 17 1 17 movie fraction real optional 111 emission child langmuir sess 111 6 1721 from to real i ce rs et 112 6 17 2 2 inclusion string optional 112 6 17 2 3 threshold real seu eviter ath oet 113 6 17 2 4 breakdown function integer optional AA A ER NR DET CE dete DR carer es ky 113 6 17 2 5 surface factor real optional 113 emission field li
253. rce limited input emission stimulated input excitation input external fields input field movie components input field movie coordinate input fileread input fission lusus inputs FOTE onasan a daa input fragmentation input freespace boundaries input FUNCTION input Functions Input input gas conductivty model input grid 3 D simulation with input incoming TEM boundaries 63 64 input injection input Integrated Probes input ion_species input ionization input laser source input Moliere Moller input Monte Carlo DENSE input Monte Carlo TENUOUS input Object o ooooocccooccoooo input PARABOLOID input PARALLELEPIPED input Particle Collapse input Particle Diagnostics input Particle Extraction input Particle Interaction input Particle Migration input particle species input Particle Targets input Particle Measurement Probes input particle movie components input periodic boundaries input photoionization input photon_output_format
254. re COMP is the component direction of the current density XIYIZ XMIN YMIN ZMIN XMAX YMAX ZMAX are diagonally opposite corners of the volume VALUE is the total current value and M is the function index specifying the time dependence of the current multiplier if present see Section 6 24 Functions Input page 144 Additional options include specification of a secondary temporal function which results in a product function with the primary temporal function a spatially dependent function which also acts as a current multiplier the reference point for that spatial dependence and three logical flags set to zeros or ones indicating which coordinates are dependent upon the spatial function These must be present if the spatial function index is non zero 6 11 4 ferrite The ferrite model creates a linear dispersive magnetic material in the specified volume The recursive convolution method Ref 11 is used to perform the necessary convolution in an efficient manner The general form of the response function is B t poH t x t H t where the denotes convolution and x t is written as N x t 5 14 sin wst B cos t e i l Chapter 6 Input Variables 95 Usually the response function is approximated by a sum of single pole Debye relaxations and double pole Lorentzian resonances For a Debye relaxation x t takes the form jt X t us bo
255. real For the plasma model these coordinate parameters describe a volume of the simulation space over which plasma is created 6 17 13 2 density function integer Integer identifying the function used to specify the spatial dependence of the particle number density Used in conjunction with the reference point and density flags pa rameters This can be a function of multiple variables corresponding to x y or z 6 17 13 3 momentum function integer optional Integer identifying the function used to specify the spatial dependence of the particle mo menta Used in conjunction with the reference point and momentum flags parameters This can be used for example to create an expanding plasma cloud with the momenta directed away from the defined reference point These are added to any drift momenta specified This function is ignored when the index is set to zero See Section 6 24 Functions Input page 144 128 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes 6 17 13 4 x dependent function integer optional Integer identifying the function used to specify the spatial dependence of the particle momenta as a function of the x coordinate relative to the value in the reference point parameter This function is used as a multiplier of any momentum components defined by either the drift momentum or the momentum function parameters and is only required in cases where it is necessary to vary the particle momenta in
256. rho background flag flag If dump rho background flag is ON output the result of the so called rho background evaluation to the scalar dump file This calculation shows the divergence of the electric field minus rho which is a measure of charge conservation The CHARGE DENSITY compiler direc tive is required to generate these quantities see Section 4 4 5 CHARGE DENSITY page 15 If no values are available nothing is written to the dump file Default OFF 6 2 10 15 dump steps integer Specifies discrete timesteps at which dumps are output These dumps will be produced in addition to those generated by any of the regular intervals used The list of timesteps is terminated by an end keyword e g dump steps 100 1000 5000 20000 end Dump steps for field particle extraction and diagnostic data can be specified inde pendently using the field dump steps particle dump steps extraction dump steps and diagnostic dump steps keywords They also have the same alternate forms as dump_ steps above Any use of them will add to the list of generically specified steps for those dumps 6 2 10 16 dump substrates flag flag If dump substrates flag is ON output substrate temperature and sorbate to metal ratio If more than one instance of the substrate model is present they are added on to the same file These files are dumped at intervals given by the diagnostic dump interval or its associated parameters see Section 6 2 10 7
257. rive_ model WAVEGUIDE can have the values RECTANGULAR or CIRCULAR 6 6 1 7 modes integer Specifies the X Y and Z mode numbers when an analytic model is used for the incoming wave For a TEM transverse electromagnetic wave set to 1 for the component of electic field carrying the wave 0 in other directions 6 6 1 8 inner_radius real Specifies the radius of the inner conductor when drive_model is ANALYTIC_TEM and geometry is COAXIAL 6 6 1 9 outer_radius real Specifies the radius of the outer conductor when drive_model is ANALYTIC_TEM and geometry is COAXIAL 6 6 1 10 circuit integer optional Integer which refers to the circuit model attached to the outlet boundary see Section 6 10 Circuit Models Input page 85 A value of zero or NONE means no circuit model is attached 6 6 1 11 connection_rank integer optional This parameter is used only if a circuit has been attached to the outlet and is an inte ger which specifies the connection rank within the circuit model attached to the outlet boundary This parameter is only necessary in rare cases where the attached network cir cuit model has multiple connection points to the simulation grid The rank numbers are assigned to the grid connections in the order that they appear in the junctions list begin ning with 1 see Section 6 10 Circuit Models Input page 85 The user must determine these numbers correctly since they do not appear anywhere explicitly
258. rmalized XI Y Z 1D transverse Lapostolle emittance in units of length radians gamma Average directed energy normalized to mc i e y 1 kenergy Average kinetic energy in eV ieff Effective current measurement rhalf Half current radius measurement Chapter 6 Input Variables 141 vdist Distribution of particle momenta unsigned gamma beta vxdist Distribution of particle momenta in the x direction signed gamma beta vydist Distribution of particle momenta in the y direction signed gamma beta vzdist Distribution of particle momenta in the z direction signed gamma beta kedist Distribution of particle energies eV Example Particle Diagnostics diagnostici qsum species 1 from 00 0 to005 diagnostic2 xbar species 1 from 00 0 to005 diagnostic3 emittance species 1 from 00 0 to005 diagnostic4 ieff species 1 radius 1 2 from 0 0 0 to 005 diagnosticb rhalf species 1 radius 1 2 from 00 0 to005 diagnostic6 vzdist species 1 3 4 from 00 0 to 5 5 b number of bins 40 range 4 0e 5 to 4 0e 5 diagnostic7 kedist species 2 from 0 0 O to 5 5 b number of bins 40 range 0 0 to automatic 142 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes 6 23 Particle Targets Input The Particle Targets section allows the user to make 2 D maps of cumulative fluence number unit area energy density and the divergence of particles passing through a grid conformal plane tar
259. rmine how to use these parameters 6 17 1 2 normal string Specifies a particle direction e g injection fileread Can take the values X X Y Y Z SL 6 17 1 3 interval integer Number of timesteps between application of particle creation model 6 17 1 4 species integer Integer identifying species to be created or for any of the stripping models the species which is acted upon to create the next higher ionized state These last are the ionization higherstate and photoionization models In such cases the identified species on the Particle Species Input list must be followed by a species corresponding to its next higher state that is with a charge greater by 1 and with a mass which is smaller by 1 See Section 6 16 Particle Species Input page 104 6 17 1 5 electron species integer Integer identifying the species to which the newly created electron produced in an ion ization event belongs The electrons may be either of kinetic or fluid type provided the compiler directive FLUID PHYSICS is defined See Section 6 16 Particle Species Input page 104 6 17 1 6 discrete numbers integer optional For the emission injection and plasma models this specifies the number of particles per cell in the X YIZ directions respectively The value in the direction of injection or emission is usually 1 Two numbers may be entered in the case of 2D simulations and are understood to correspond to the actual dimension
260. rt angle and sweep angle which indicate a possibly limited extent in the torus This angle is assumed to be zero in the direction of the azimuthal AXIS after rotation Coordinate system independent shape Example object5 TORUS conductor on medium O potential 0 center 9 0 0 0 3 0 polar_angle Z 30 0 azimuthal_angle X 0 0 major_radius 2 0 minor_radius 0 7 start_angle 90 sweep_angle 180 62 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes 6 5 13 WIRE Defines a thin wire Two of the from coordinates must be the same as the corresponding to coordinates i e the values define a conformal one dimensional object This object must be a conductor It cannot be associated with a medium model This should not be used as an accurate model for a specific inductance As an approximation the characteristic cross section of such an object is on the order of the grid spacing containing it Coordinate system dependent shape Example object62 WIRE thin connector conductor on potential 0 from 2 5 0 0 12 0 to 2 5 0 0 18 0 Chapter 6 Input Variables 63 6 6 Boundaries Input A boundary is defined as a grid conformal surface which coincides with an outer surface of the simulation space Except for the r 0 axis in cylindrical coordinates and the polar axis in spherical coordinates boundary conditions must be explicitly defined by the user at each grid boundary Conducting boundaries are created using conducting
261. rticle scattering model see Section 4 4 48 SCATTERING_ON page 21 Also used whenever particle densities by species are required see Section 4 4 44 NUMBER_DENSITIES page 21 The default value is 1 but must be set to a larger value when the number of species entered on input is more than one Default 1 4 4 41 MULTI PROCESS Enables the use of multiple processes to sub divide a simulation into domains 4 4 42 MUTABLE_SPECIES Defines the maximum number of mutable species present in the simulation that is those that can be ionized to a higher charge state This directive is used in conjunction with the IONIZATION ON compiler directive see Section 4 4 32 IONIZATION ON page 19 for the ionization model see Section 6 17 10 ionization page 122 To set this properly count the number of species in the Particle Species section which can be ionized to a higher charge state the value of MUTABLE SPECIES should be greater than or equal to this number see Section 6 16 Particle Species Input page 104 Default 1 Chapter 4 Compiling LSP 21 4 4 43 NO_PARTICLES Eliminates particle related code from compilation The advantage of this option is that a smaller executable file can be used for simulations which require no particles 4 4 44 NUMBER_DENSITIES Includes number densities for each particle species as cell quantities This is required for the ion ion stripping model see Section 6 17 11 higherstate page
262. s 37 IMPLICIT_FIELDS implicit_subcycles 37 IMPLICIT_FIELDS implicit_tolerance 38 IMPLICIT_FIELDS paramagnetic 96 IMPLICIT FIELDS USE PERMEABILITY 23 IMPLICIT FIELDS USE PERMITTIVITY 23 implicit filtering parameter definition 107 implicit iterations definition 3T implicit omega min factor definition 37 implicit_species_flag definition 106 implicit subcycles definition 37 implicit tolerance definition 38 imploding liner model Linder Models Input 97 175 imploding liner model termination 89 inclusion definition 112 incoming TEM boundaries sample input 63 64 Incompatible Compiler Directive Errors 15 inductance definition 90 initial_balance_flag definition 33 injection definition 0 115 injection sample input 115 injection discrete numbers 109 injection Particle Slice Probes 153 injection slice_times 111 inner radius definition 67 input file ATHETA Magnetic Field File 100 input file BFIELD Magnetic Field File 100 input file command 11 input file command Running LSP 7 input file Fileread Particle File 131 input file input 1sp ASCIQ
263. s example is obtained from the analytic extrapolation For energies smaller than the lowest incident energy in the table the scattered energy distribution for the lowest incident energy is used scaled to the actual incident particle energy 7 3 Method 4 Cross Section File The cross section file used by method 4 see Section 6 9 34 method 4 page 83 is gen erated by the XGEN program part of the ITS code family Ref 5 A sample input file for XGEN is MATERIAL TA TITLE 20 MEV standard codes cross sections for Tantalum ENERGY 20 This input file will generate cross section data for electron energy loss and scattering in tantalum for electron energies below 20 MeV For ITS version 3 0 the XGEN program writes this data to a text file named fort 11 The name of this file which may be changed to something more meaningful is specified by the xgen data file parameter in the method 4 input Consult the user s manual for the ITS 3 0 codes Ref 6 for more information on the XGEN program ITS can be licensed from the Radiation Safety Information Computational Center at Oak Ridge National Laboratory http epicws epm ornl gov rsic html 7 4 BFIELD Magnetic Field File The datafile produced by the BFIELD code is written in the following order int nx1 number of grid points in axial direction int nx2 number of grid points in radial direction float dx1 axial grid size 160 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E C
264. s than moving or deleting the dat files is to use the ra option on the command line instead of the r flag 3 2 1 Workstation Network On a workstation network with the MPICH version of MPI installed http www unix mcs anl gov mpi mpich start a multiple processor ver sion of LSP using the p4 no relation to the P4 postprocessor Section 1 3 P4 Postprocessor page 3 communication device as follows lsp p4pg pgroup opt input lsp where the file pgroup specifies a p4 processor group such as local 0 cerebro 1 usr1 run7 1sp achilles 1 usr1 run7 lsp which specifies that three processes are to be used see Section 6 2 3 3 number of processes page 33 one on the local computer one on computer cerebro which may also be the local computer and one on computer achilles The path to the executable on each computer must be supplied The path also specifies the run directory so the executable or a link to it must be in the run directory 3 2 2 DEC Cluster On the DEC Unix cluster start a multiple processor version of LSP with dmpirun np NP lsp opt input lsp where NP is the number of processes to use This number must be the same as the number_ of processes parameter in the input file see Section 6 2 Control Input page 30 3 2 3 Intel Teraflop On the Intel Teraflop ASCI Red start LSP interactively on NP processors using yod sz NP lsp opt input lsp gt
265. s used This input item defaults to a single particle per cell Default 111 110 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes 6 17 1 7 centroid1 amp 2_function integer optional Integers identifying the functions centroidi function and centroid2 function used to specify the time dependence of the injected beam centroid position in the two directions transverse to the injection direction relative to the reference point below The two directions are in cyclic order X Y Z with the injection direction However for cylindrical coordinates where the injection direction is Z the transverse directions for these functions are understood to be in a cartesian sense that is X and Y These parameters are optional and may be omitted or set to zero if there is no centroid motion See Section 6 24 Functions Input page 144 6 17 1 8 reference point real The origin for particle coordinates is shifted to the coordinates of reference point on the simulation grid The number of values which follow this parameter may correspond to the actual number of dimensions defined for the simulation 1 2 or 3 although all three values may be present when a reduced number of dimensions is used 6 17 1 9 drift momentum real Specifies constant momentum values in the X Y Z directions which are applied to ev ery particle in units of gamma beta This parameter conflicts with the drift velocity parameter and they should not both
266. s with a message indicating the domain which is at fault Default OFF 6 2 11 4 print control flag flag If print control flag is ON write the control data structure to standard output Default OFF 6 2 11 5 print convergence flag flag If print convergence flag is ON write convergence information for iterative field al gorithms to standard output Default OFF 6 2 11 6 print grid flag flag If print grid flag is ON write grid coordinates and spacing to standard output Default OFF 6 2 11 7 print region flag flag If print region flag is ON write region parameters to standard output Default OFF 6 2 11 8 dump timing flag flag If dump timing flag is ON output immediate CPU wall clock run time performance data for all domains onto a history file with the name histcpuN p4 where N is an integer This data is divided into categories for field solution particle solution and communication data exchange between processes The value of N will be 1 at the beginning of a simulation and a new and different file will be opened each time that a restart run is performed each with an incremented value of N Thereby all of the timing files are automatically preserved through subsequent restarts of a complete simulation All timing data are in seconds Default OFF Chapter 6 Input Variables 51 6 2 11 9 report timing flag flag If report timing flag is ON include cumulative CPU wall clock run time
267. se field being calculated Note that this component should not be the same as the main component given by the alignment axis parameter Default NONE 6 15 8 order integer optional For the THETA option of the symmetry direction parameter only the order parameter indicates the order of the expansion used in the evaluation of the transverse dependence for axial symmetry The value used should not exceed 6 Generally use of higher orders requires more highly resolved and accurate data in the spatial function Default 2 6 15 9 temporal function integer optional Integer identifying the time dependent function used to multiply the external field value s For the COMPONENT option there are no restrictions in the use of this parameter when multiple instances of external field are required However with the more complex descriptions designated by the ANALYTIC and DATAFILE options use of multiple instances of either of these types of the same field are restricted to a single temporal dependence given by this parameter in the first instance For no time dependence set the value to 0 See Section 6 24 Functions Input page 144 104 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes 6 16 Particle Species Input The Particle Species section specifies the particle species to be used in the sim ulation and their properties Each species is identified by the integer index appended to the species keyword This integer is
268. see Sec tion 6 2 Control Input page 30 The convergence criterion for static solution is given by potential_tolerance which is also specified in the Control section The circuit and temporal_function parameters are optional and are used for time dependent variations in the applied potentials They may appear after any non zero potential The circuit param eter is used in conjunction with the Circuit Models section of input see Section 6 10 Circuit Models Input page 85 in order to vary the voltage relative to zero according to the amount of charge deposited on conductors of that potential In cases where more than one potential has a circuit model associated with them they must not be the same circuit model with the same index Any circuit model invoked here will supersede the effect of the temporal_function parameter if present The maximum number of distinct potentials that can be used is 3 Example of a constant potential Control potential_iterations 500 potential_tolerance 0 001 Potentials potentiali 0 0 potential2 500 0 Example of a potential obtained from a circuit model Potentials potentiali 0 0 potential2 1 0 circuit 1 Example of a time varying potential described by a function Potentials potentiali 0 0 potential2 1 0 temporal_function 2 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes 6 8 Materials Input The Materials section is used to specify materials contained in the medium
269. set to zero See Section 6 24 Functions Input page 144 6 17 6 5 spatial momentum function integer Integer identifying the function used to specify the spatial variation of the injected particle momentum which is actually in units of gamma beta Used in conjunction with the reference point and spatial flags parameters The resulting values replace any drift momentum specified in the normal direction This function is optional and is ignored when the index is set to zero See Section 6 24 Functions Input page 144 6 17 6 6 temporal momentum function integer Integer identifying the function used to specify the temporal dependence of the injected particle momentum which is actually in units of gamma beta The resulting values replace any drift momentum specified in the normal direction This function is optional and is ignored when the index is set to zero If defined it supersedes the spatial momentum function See Section 6 24 Functions Input page 144 6 17 6 7 spatial flags flag A set of flags for each of the dimensions X Y Z with ON or OFF values indicating the coordinates on which the spatial functions are dependent If two of these are ON simultane ously which is often the case then the spatial dependence is radial The exception to this rule is when a 2 D function is specified in which case the two dimensions are independent arguments of the spatial function 6 17 6 8 deflection1 amp 2 angle real optiona
270. simulation fidelity appropriate error messages are printed which locate the portion of the grid containing the fault and the simulation is aborted An example is PO boundary check error at ZMIN x range 0 00e 00 1 00e 00 y range 0 00e 00 0 00e 00 X Error s on domain boundary detected Domain boundary ZMIN Check input data for completeness which indicates that the domain under control of process 0 has been found to have an undefined boundary at the lower side in the z coordinate The most common cause for this kind of error is a hole in the simulation boundary which can be patched with a conducting surface 3 5 Command File While running a simulation LSP checks periodically for a file named command in the directory from which it is started This file may contain one of the following strings which cause the code to perform certain actions at the current timestep dump Write all particle scalar field and diagnostic dumps Stop Write a restart dump and stop the run abort Stop the run with no restart dump rdump Write a restart dump and continue report Print domain statistics to gauge load balance particles Print particle statistics by species balance Rebalance the computational load among processes Under either Windows Unix or Mac OS X one can create the file command containing the word stop with the command echo stop gt command 12 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T
271. sis 95 magnetic hysteresis model MAGNETIC_HYSTERESIS ghd nis tue Bee E e TE 20 magnetic materials applied current 34 magnetic materials ferrite 94 magnetic materials hysteresis 95 magnetic materials MAGNETIC_DISPERSION 20 magnetic materials MAGNETIC_HYSTERESIS 20 magnetic materials paramagnetic 96 MAGNETIC_DISPERSION compiler directives 20 MAGNETIC_DISPERSION ferrite 94 magnetic force filtering parameter definition a an ro Kana pra paa MOIS 35 MAGNETIC_HYSTERESIS compiler directives 20 MAGNETIC_HYSTERESIS hysteresis 95 magnetic spatial filtering parameter 21 magnetic spatial filtering parameter definition espe aan Need xa 36 MAGNETOSTATIC compiler directives 20 magnetostatic fieldS oooooooooooo 20 magnetostatic fields Convergence Probes 154 magnetostatic fields MAGNETOSTATIC 20 MAGNETOSTATIC_FFT2D compiler directives 20 make Compiling on Unix and Mac OS X 13 make pc sample file 14 makedef sample file Compiling on Unix and Mac QOS XK acs is aes e Dea le eae 13 mass definition eee eee eee 105 material conductivity o o 72 75 material dielectric llis eese eee eee 78 material magnetic 78 Materials Input 22 2 irr Rt 72 materials list 0f o o o o oo
272. species 1 first_product_species 2 movie tag O second product species 3 movie tag O x Cross sections 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 5e 15 2 5e 15 end movie fraction 0 0 0 0 6 17 15 1 from to real For the fragmentation model these coordinates define a volume of the simulation space over which the model is applied 6 17 15 2 first_product_species integer This is the index of the first species in the resulting pair of product particles involved in this process 6 17 15 3 second_product_species integer This is the index of the second species in the resulting pair of product particles involved in this process 6 17 15 4 cross_sections real Specifies the cross sections for each species present which contributes to a total prob ability for a fragmenting event on the target species When zero values are specified the effect of that species is not included There is no effect due to the ambient field stress at present 6 17 16 fileread The fileread model injects particles from a user supplied data file Chapter 6 Input Variables 131 The model specific parameters are described below Generic parameters are described in Section 6 17 1 Particle Creation Parameters page 109 Example Beam fileread fileread from 1 0 1 0 0 0 to 1 0 1 0 0 0 normal Z interval 1 species 1 particle_data_file slice dat temporal_function 1 centroidi_function O centroid2 function O reference point 0 0 O
273. ssed by the code in the order that they appear in the input file regardless of index numbering The beginning of each object has the format objectN SHAPE conductor on off medium M x potential P where N is the object number SHAPE is the geometric shape M an integer indicating the associated medium 0 for none and P an integer indicating the associated potential 0 for none The medium and potential parameters are optional with default values of 0 In addition to the sequence of objects listed in the Objects Input section there may appear the keywords intersect and end inserted around any group of objects This causes those objects to be collectively combined as an intersection resulting in a material structure only where they overlap All of the objects in an intersected group must therefore have exactly the same attributes listed above which are the conductor flag medium identifier and potential index The object types FOIL and WIRE cannot appear in these intersections Example objecti BLOCK conductor on potential 1 intersect Chapter 6 Input Variables 57 object2 SPHERE conductor on medium 1 object3 BLOCK conductor on medium 1 end object4 BLOCK conductor off Here objects 2 and 3 are intersected to produce a hemisphere of a conducting material described by the medium of index 1 Some shapes BLOCK and FOIL define grid conformal objects and so depend completely on which coordinate syst
274. t 0 0 c eee eee ee 97 6 13 Subgrid Models Input 00 c eee eee eee 98 6 14 Substrate Models Input 99 6 15 External Fields Input 100 6 15 1 type string us sid A a ee et 101 6 15 2 field string a haaa eG aa Sua eb ede 102 6 15 3 format string optional mem 102 6 15 4 from to real optional cile asa eS 102 6 15 5 reference point real optional 102 6 15 6 alignment axis string optional 103 6 15 7 symmetry direction string optional 103 6 15 8 order integer optional 103 6 15 9 temporal function integer optional 103 6 16 Particle Species Input 0 00000 eee eee eee eee 104 6 16 1 charge realce hae 105 6 16 2 mass real oss ei sate DPI hoe Ee Ts 105 6 16 3 atomic number real optional 105 6 16 4 fluid species flag flag optional 106 6 16 5 migrant species flag flag optional 106 6 16 6 implicit species flag flag optional 106 6 16 7 particle motion flag flag optional 106 6 16 8 particle forces option string optional 106 6 16 8 1 transverse weighting flag flag optional Gana Say trol en fob ainda AA Waaa dee edad tre aa gd pide 107 6 16 9 particle kinematics option string optional 107 6 16 10 montecarlo scattering flag flag optional 107 6 16 11 implicit filtering paramete
275. t see Section 6 24 Functions Input page 144 6 17 14 excitation The excitation model converts electrons from a low energy state to an excited state by laser acceleration Example excitation from 1 0 1 0 0 0 to 1 0 1 0 5 0 interval 10 Species 1 excited species 2 conversion rate 50 0 temporal function 3 sampling rate 1 0 drift momentum 0 O 1000 0 thermal energy 300 0 movie tag O movie fraction 0 0 6 17 14 1 from to real For the excitation model these coordinates define a volume of the simulation space over which the particle excitation is applied 6 17 14 2 conversion rate real Conversion rate for the production of excited state particles from the plasma species in fraction per unit time 6 17 14 3 temporal function integer optional Integer identifying the function used to specify the time dependence of the conversion rate as a multiplier See Section 6 24 Functions Input page 144 6 17 14 4 sampling rate real optional Sampling rate for random selection of events as a unitless fraction The default value causes every test particle to produce an event Default 1 0 130 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes 6 17 15 fragmentation The fragmentation model converts heavy molecules into two smaller ones by bond break ing due to impacting processes of the ambient particles Example fragmentation from 0 0 0 0 O to 5 0 5 0 5 interval 20
276. tering_parameter page 35 and Section 6 2 4 14 magnetic_spatial_filtering_parameter page 36 4 4 50 SPH ONE Use 1 D spherical radial coordinates 4 4 51 SPH R TH Use 2 D spherical r theta coordinates 22 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes 4 4 52 SPHERICAL Use 3 D spherical r theta phi coordinates 4 4 53 STATIC_FIELDS Solve the static field equations instead of electromagnetic equations This directive implies CHARGE DENSITY as well see Section 4 4 5 CHARGE DENSITY page 15 4 4 54 STATIC_FIELDS_FFT2D Solve for transverse electrostatic fields using the FFT method assuming rectangular conducting simulation boundaries Useful for some paraxial beam simulations 4 4 55 STIMULUS_DEPOSITION Use specific stimulating species for stimulated emission instead of the total charge de position of all species at the emission surfaces If more than one stimulating species is required for different instances of the stimulated emission model the STIMULUS_SPECIES compiler directive must be set to that number see Section 4 4 56 STIMULUS_SPECIES page 22 Each stimulating species can only be used for a single stimulated model See also Section 6 17 5 emission stimulated page 114 4 4 56 STIMULUS_SPECIES When stimulated emission requires a specific stimulating species rather than the total charge deposition STIMULUS_SPECIES should be set to the total number of distinct stimulat ing s
277. th it and may also have a medium see Section 6 9 Medium Models Input page 73 and electrostatic potential assigned to it For an outlet boundary the potential values are specified by the potentials parameters in the outlet boundary input see Section 6 6 1 Outlet Boundaries page 63 If the electrostatic field solver is used see Section 4 4 53 STATIC_FIELDS page 22 the potential values are specified in the Potentials section of the input file see Section 6 7 Potentials Input page 71 Note In order to set guard cell properties conducting objects within the simulation space which are in contact with the boundary must be extended through the boundary to encompass the two guard cells at each boundary rather than stopping at the boundary The converse applies when the SOLID object qualifier see Section 6 5 10 SOLID page 61 is used to make the entire space conducting in that case subsequent nonconducting objects within the simulation space which are in contact with the boundary should be extended through the boundary into coordinates outside the simulation space in order to create an opening if that is the desired result Otherwise the effect is such that a conducting wall remains at that boundary of the simulation space Objects should be numbered consecutively in the input file as a matter of good practice for determining where errors occur the code uses these index numbers when reporting input errors The objects are proce
278. thod 4 from to secondary 119 method 4 Global Medium Probes 154 method 4 KELVIN_DEPOSITION 19 method 4 Method 4 Cross Section File 159 method 4 Particle Creation Input 108 method 4 Photon Output Data File 162 method 4 polar_angle 0 77 method 4 Primary Output Data File 162 method 4 secondary sese 118 method 4 temperature sese 74 method 4 USE_LXSEC o oo oooooooococomoo oo 24 migrant_species_flag definition 106 migrant_species_flag Particle Migration Input NA 135 minimum charge definition 122 minimum energy definition 78 MKS Unitsie 2 cent v ye eek eee ee ce gt 25 model photoionization definition 125 modes definition eee eee eee 67 Moliere lle hee ee ei 79 Moliere Moller sample input 79 Moller AA hs PR pe sean dente ss REI wae 79 molybdenum 00 eee 72 78 momentum transfer frequencies Particle Interaction Data File 161 momentum_flags plasma definition 128 momentum_flags momentum_function plasma rp 127 momentum function plasma definition 127 monolayers definition 121 monolayers maximum_desorption_rate 121 Monte Carlo transport model extract_photons_flag 44 R E Clark and T P Hughes
279. tion and polarization are specified in the outlet boundary input The analytic function 19 index number is associated with this function see Section 6 24 Functions Input page 144 6 6 1 5 potentials real Used only when drive_model is POTENTIAL Indexed list of potential values to be as signed to electrodes forming the transmission line opening These values are used to set boundary conditions for the 2 D numerical solution of the TEM transverse electromag netic fields at the boundary The potential value for index 1 is assigned to objects having potential index 1 etc see Section 6 5 Objects Input page 56 These indices are local to each outlet boundary Thus an object s potential index may refer to a different potential Chapter 6 Input Variables 67 for different outlets Only the potential difference between the different electrodes within a particular outlet has any physical significance The maximum number of distinct potentials that can be defined is 3 The values in this list are usually integral and are such that values assigned to adjacent electrodes differ by 1 This is because the actual value of the potential is the product of this difference and the number given by the temporal_function associated with the boundary 6 6 1 6 geometry string Specifies the geometry of the opening when an analytic model is used for the incoming wave For drive_model ANALYTIC_TEM can have the values FLAT or COAXIAL For d
280. tion averaged Nitrogen ions Species2 charge 1 mass 27540 0 atomic number 7 species3 charge 2 mass 27539 0 atomic_number 7 Example of implicit species Particle Species species1 charge 1 mass 1 0 implicit species flag on particle motion flag on particle forces option primary montecarlo scattering flag on implicit filtering parameter 1 0 selection ratio 0 2 6 16 1 charge real Gives the charge state for each species normalized to that for a positron Thus an electron is 1 and a proton is 1 plus sign optional and a neutral is 0 6 16 2 mass real Gives the mass for each species normalized to that for a positron Thus an electron is 1 and a proton is 1836 6 16 3 atomic number real optional Atomic number of ion species Used with the ionization model see Sec tion 6 17 10 ionization page 122 the photoionization model see Section 6 17 12 photoionization page 124 or with the higherstate model see Section 6 17 11 higherstate page 123 that is any particle creation model which involves the transition into a higher charge state ionization or stripping 106 LSP User s Manual and Reference R E Clark and T P Hughes 6 16 4 fluid species flag flag optional Indicates which charged particle species are treated as fluid particles when the fluid physics see Section 4 4 25 FLUID_PHYSICS page 18 portion of the collisional plasma scattering model see Section 4 4 48
281. tion will contribute to the measurement and unsigned meaning that particles traveling in either direction will contribute The measurements may be further restricted by any of the optional windowing parameters shown limited to either of the two directions transverse to the DIR parameter That is if DIR is Z then the z window parameter does not apply The windowing is done in a cartesian sense for the first three options whereas the r window parameter limits the overall radius of the mea surement All quantities are weighted by the numerical magnitude of the particles except dqdt which is weighted by charge The available types are dqdt Total current through the plane xbar ybar zbar Average of particle X Y Z coordinates relative to the at coordinate xrms yrms zrms Root mean square average of particle X Y Z coordinates with respect to the at coordinate radrms Root mean square average of particle coordinates transverse to DIR vxbar vybar vzbar Average of particle X Y Z momenta gamma beta vxrms vyrms vzrms Root mean square average of X Yl Z momenta gamma beta emittance Normalized 2D transverse Lapostolle emittance in units of length radians emitx emity emitz Normalized XI Y Z 1D transverse Lapostolle emittance in units of length radians gamma Average directed energy normalized to mc i e y 1 kenergy Average kinetic energy in eV ieff Effective current measurement rhalf Hal
282. to be defined by the user either by functional prescription or from data files and applied to particle forces In addition the definition must be equal to the number of instances of those types of applications if more than one is required Note that this directive is not required for simple constant values of applied field see Section 6 15 External Fields Input page 100 4 4 24 EXTRA MOTION Enables particles to travel more than one cell in a timestep Usually when the timestep is limited by the Courant condition this is not necessary But in cases where this limitation is not enforced either by static field solution or by implicit field solution this directive should be used One disadvantage of this directive is that at domain boundaries particles that move more than a single cell beyond that boundary in a timestep will be held back which may be undesirable If so the user may want to use the INTER DOMAIN TRACKING directive which may have slightly less running efficiency see Section 4 4 31 INTER DOMAIN TRACKING page 19 4 4 25 FLUID_PHYSICS Enables electrons or ions to be treated using fluid equations instead of kinetic equations in a collisional plasma This is used in conjuction with either the COLLISIONAL_PLASMA or the SCATTERING_ON compiler directives Fluid species are indicated by turning on the fluid species flagin the Particle Species section of input see Section 6 16 Particle Species Input page 104 4 4 2
283. tric energy deposition or energy deposition rates for either surface or volumetric energy see Chapter 5 User Units page 25 Example probe electric field energy volume E from 0 0 0 0 0 0 to 10 0 5 0 5 0 Slight variations of this format occur for some of the volume integrals For RHON the summation is made for a single species and must be specified as in the following example probe8 volume RHON Species 3 from 0 0 0 0 0 0 to 10 0 5 0 5 0 For WDEP EDEP DWDT and DEDT the summation can optionally be made for a specified medium as given in the example probe9 volume WDEP medium 2 from 0 0 0 0 0 0 to 10 0 5 0 5 0 If no medium is specified then the summation is made over all mediums present 6 25 3 Particle Measurement Probes Particle measurement probes compute moments of the particle distribution passing through a specified grid conformal plane The format is particle TYPE species SP direction DIR at XYZ x window 1 5 y window 1 5 Chapter 6 Input Variables 151 z window 0 0 x r window 0 0 x where TYPE is one of the types from the table below SP is the species index see Sec tion 6 16 Particle Species Input page 104 DIR is the direction of particle motion X X XIYI YI YIZI ZI Z and the plane is normal to the DIR direction and passes through the at coordinates The DIR parameter may be signed or unsigned signed meaning that only particles moving in that direc
284. type see Section 6 9 19 conductivity medium page 76 The quantities related to the ohmic medium model include the background plasma electron density the momentum transfer frequency in in verse seconds the plasma electron temperature in eV and the resulting conductivity The USE OHMIC TERMS compiler directive is required to generate these quantities see Sec tion 4 4 62 USE OHMIC TERMS page 23 If no values are available nothing is written to the dump file Default OFF 6 2 10 11 dump plasma quantities flag flag If dump plasma quantities flag is ON output plasma densities temperatures and collision frequencies by species to the scalar dump file The SCATTERING ON compiler directive must be defined to obtain non zero values see Section 4 4 48 SCATTERING ON page 21 If no values are available nothing is written to the dump file Default OFF 6 2 10 12 dump potential flag flag If dump potential flag is ON output electric potentials to the scalar dump file If none are available no values are written Default OFF 6 2 10 13 dump rbtheta current flag flag If dump rbtheta current flag is ON output the product r Bj to the scalar dump file The CYLINDRICAL or CYL_R_Z compiler directive must be defined in order for this to be used Chapter 6 Input Variables 43 see Section 4 4 13 CYLINDRICAL page 16 or Section 4 4 12 CYL_R_Z page 16 Units are amperes Default OFF 6 2 10 14 dump
285. u CH tU qua URBI Mese a BNt1 2 EN BN 1 2 Vx EN At where o4 4 1 A time_bias_coefficient value of O gives the unbiased explicit algorithm Biasing causes the electromagnetic fields to damp at a rate which increases with wavenumber It can be useful in damping numerical noise and instabilities see Ref 4 The implicit equations are solved iteratively 6 2 4 17 time_bias_iterations integer Number of iterations to be used in time bias algorithm Usually the number of iterations needs to increase with the value of time_bias_coefficient Commonly used values are time_bias_coefficient time_bias_iterations 0 125 2 3 0 25 3 4 0 5 4 6 0 75 6 16 More iterations cause the field solver to run slower 6 2 4 18 temporal filtering parameter real Damping parameter in temporal filtering algorithm to suppress short wavelength elec tromagnetic fields see Ref 9 Requires the TEMPORAL FILTER compiler directive see Section 4 4 58 TEMPORAL FILTER page 22 A value of 0 recovers the undamped leapfrog algorithm This filtering is only appropriate in certain simulation conditions For example it is never used with any static fields solution It can be used with the explicit fields solution only if time biasing is not being used It can also be used with the exact version of the implicit fields solution Default 0 0 no filtering Chapter 6 Input Variables 37 6 2 5 Implicit Field Algorithm 6 2 5 1 error_current_f
286. ulation space The format is simply energy TYPE where TYPE is one of the types from the table below The available types are field_flux Instantaneous energy flux rate into the system through the fields at outlet boundaries particle_flux Instantaneous energy flux rate into the system through particle creation dedx_loss Instantaneous energy lost from the system through particle absorption field_energy Total energy in the system contained in the fields particle_energy Total energy in the system contained in the particles total_energy Total energy in the system of both kinds net_energy Amount of energy in the system which is not accounted for that is the total energy in the system minus the accumulated measurable energy gained by the system up to the time that this measurement is taken If there are no other abnormal means of energy entering or leaving the system this could be a good measurement of energy conservation in the field particle interactions or the collisional plasma processes 6 25 7 Global Medium Probes Global medium probes take integrated measurements over the entire simulation space The format is simply medium M TYPE where M is the medium index and TYPE is one of the types from the table below The only available type is radiation_energy Cumulative energy radiated by Bremsstrahlung production from a method 4 medium model see Section 6 9 34 method 4 page 83
287. utput of the restart dump An uncorrupted restart dump will remain with only the amount of calculation between those two restart dumps having been lost Default OFF 6 2 2 4 restart interval real Options for this parameter are restart interval Number of timesteps between restart dumps restart interval time Interval in user units between restart dumps restart interval ns Interval in ns between restart dumps restart interval cm Interval in units of 1 cm c where c is the velocity of light between restart dumps Default 1 e 9 no dumps 6 2 3 Parallel Processing 6 2 3 1 balance interval real When running on a multiple processor computer LSP can move domain boundaries to rebalance the computational load among the processors This parameter sets the interval at which the code checks to see if load balancing is needed see Section 6 2 3 2 load_ balance flag page 33 and Section 6 2 3 4 region balance flag page 33 Options for this parameter are balance interval Number of timesteps between load balance checks balance interval time Interval in user units between load balance checks balance interval ns Interval in ns between load balance checks balance interval cm Interval in units of 1 cm c where c is the velocity of light between load balance checks Default 1 e 9 no rebalances Chapter 6 Input Variables 33 6 2 3 2 load_balance flag flag If load_balance_flag is ON check t
288. value of the electron density in the background plasma see Section 4 4 47 QUASINEUTRAL FIELDS page 21 Default 1 e10 in number cubic centimeter 6 2 4 4 cold test flag flag If cold test flag is ON run the simulation without particles Any particle creation statements in the input file are ignored Default OFF 6 2 4 5 convergence iterations integer Maximum number of iterations to be used in any of the various iterative field solutions Fewer iterations are used when the solution satisfies the convergence criterion warning message is usually printed if this limit is reached without convergence This parameter can be used instead of implicit iterations or potential iterations 6 2 4 6 convergence tolerance real Convergence criterion for any of the various iterative field solutions Values typically range from 1 e 3 to 1 e 7 possibly smaller depending on the type of field solution being used This parameter can be used instead of implicit tolerance or potential tolerance Default 1 e 3 6 2 4 7 dielectric kill flag flag If dielectric kill flag is ON kill any particles that impact a dielectric material whether it is a volume model see Section 6 11 Volume Models Input page 92 or a medium model of method 0 see Section 6 9 Medium Models Input page 73 Default ON Chapter 6 Input Variables 35 6 2 4 8 electric_force_filtering_parameter real Applies temporal smoothing to the electric field applie
289. wet ited aoe Ber Y e ueber 9 ATHETA Magnetic Field File 160 atomnic n mber ziv va hs oe ee aw eps 72 atomic number definition 105 atomic weight 0 cece cece eens 72 avalanche ionization conductivity medium 76 azimuthal angle definition 77 B RE WAS 148 150 background runs Single Processor Machines 7 background electron conductivity definition ais 34 background plasma density definition 34 backscatter definition 119 backscatter sample input 119 backscatter method 3 ss esses 82 backscatter data file definition 83 balance Command File 11 balance interval definition 32 balance interval load balance flag 33 batch TUNS esenee due Im BULA E PORE Ana 9 BFIELD Magnetic Field File 159 binding energy definition 121 BLOCK definiti0N ooooooccooooccooooo 57 BLOCK sample input see esses 5T BLOCK FOIL i iets 352 a 58 BNODE Se tie oa Iq ete bh 148 boundaries defined an 63 Boundaries Input eee eee eee 63 Boundary ETrTOrs 0 0s eee eee ee eee 11 breakdown_function definition 113 C C compiler Compiling on MS Windows 13 capacitance definition 90 CAR ONE compiler directives 15 CA
290. x nymax nzmax 40 40 40 X y Zz Bx By Bz 10 0000 10 0000 10 0000 412 227 412 227 1 34749 9 48718 10 0000 10 0000 426 651 426 651 1 33026 8 97436 10 0000 10 0000 441 449 441 449 1 28552 8 97436 10 0000 10 0000 450 803 450 803 0 0855465 9 48718 10 0000 10 0000 435 347 435 347 0 0926784 10 0000 10 0000 10 0000 420 296 420 296 0 0983440 where the field values are in units of kilogauss and the spatial coordinates are in cm See Section 6 15 External Fields Input page 100 Chapter 7 File Formats 161 7 7 MAFCO Magnetic Field File The binary file produced by the MAFCO code contains Bx By Bz data in cartesian or cylindrical coordinates in a format similar to an LSP field dump so that it may be displayed by the P4 utility Field values are in units of gauss and the spatial coordinates are in cm 7 8 Fileread Particle File The user supplied particle data file for the fileread injection model see Section 6 17 16 fileread page 130 is in XDR binary format and is created by a previously run LSP simulation using an instance of particle extraction available in the Particle Extraction section of input See Section 6 20 Particle Extraction Input page 137 It contains the data necessary to continue a beam transport problem in a downstream region of space not contained in the first simulation 7 9 Particle Interaction Data File There are presently three types of data files used to characterize interactions between
291. y loss and not a TENUOUS gas for the conductivity model 6 9 30 method 0 Used for simple material properties only where no particle scattering or energy loss models are applied For solid materials particles entering will be absorbed automatically as opposed to other methods which may or may not stop particles depending on the result of an energy loss calculation or some other criterion This method can be used to specify a conductivity model in a gaseous material TENUOUS medium type or to specify dielectric materials see Section 6 9 3 dielectric_constant page 73 or paramagnetic materials see Section 6 9 5 permeability page 74 which directly affect only the electromagnetic fields Example of a medium specifying dielectric material only Medium Models medium1 method 0 dielectric_constant 7 0 surface conductivity O Example of a medium specifying a gas conductivity model only Medium Models medium1 type TENUOUS method 0 conductivity on electron density 1 0e5 temperature 300 gas material air air model EEDF water content 0 04 diffusion length 12 0 6 9 31 method 1 Applies internally computed energy loss Moller s expression and or small angle mul tiple scattering Moli re scattering to electrons The method 1 parameters used to set up the internal scattering tables are described below Example of a dense medium using internally computed Moliere scattering and Moller energy loss ta
292. zation sample input 122 ionization cross sections Particle Interaction Data Tale 52e las 161 ionization model conductivity medium 76 ionization model emission stimulated 114 ionization model IONIZATION_ON 19 ionization model Particle Interaction Input 138 ionization atomic_number 105 ionization COLLISIONAL PLASMA 16 ionization from to ionization 122 ionization ionization interval 38 ionization MUTABLE SPECIES 20 ionization Particle Interaction Data File 161 ionization Particle Species Input 104 ionization factors definition 123 ionization factors production rates 123 ionization interval definition 38 ionization interval COLLISIONAL PLASMA 16 ionization interval ionization 122 ionization interval ionization factors 123 ionization interval IONIZATION ON 19 ionization interval production rates 123 IONIZATION ON compiler directives 19 IONIZATION ON ionization 122 IONIZATION ON MUTABLE SPECIES 20 IONIZATION ON Particle Interaction Input 138 ionization potential s s sss 72 ionization_potential higherstate definition e o aaah es 124 ionization_potential photoionization Gefinition viii ea ex aun Seles 126 MO A AE e ESSE Poi ars 72 78 ITS Integrated Ti

LSP User`s Manual and Reference

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents